HP PAVILION Pavilion DV8300 Maintenance And Service Manual
Main tenan ce and Ser vice Gu id e HP P a v ili on d v8 3 00 Notebook P C Doc ument P art Number : 3 9 86 7 7 -001 F ebr uary 2006 This guide is a troubleshooting reference used for maintaining and servicing the computer . It provides comprehensi v e information on identifying computer features, components, and spare parts; troubleshooting computer problems; and performing computer disassembly procedures.
© Copyright 2006 He wlett-P ackard Dev elopment Compan y , L.P . Microsoft and W indows are U.S. re gistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark o wned by its proprietor and used b y He wlett-Packard Compan y under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor . The information contained herein is su bject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompan ying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty . HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Maintenance and S erv ice Gui de HP P av i lio n dv8 300 Not ebook PC F irst E dition: F ebruary 2006 Document P ar t Numb er : 3 98 6 7 7 -001
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de iii Cont e nt s 1 Product Description 1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â2 1.2 Resetting the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â4 1.3 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â5 1.4 External Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â6 1.5 Design Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â24 2 Troubleshooting 2.1 Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1 Accessing Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â2 Computer Setup Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â2 Selecting from the File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â3 Selecting from the Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â4 Selecting from the Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â5 Selecting from the Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â6 2.2 Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â7
i v Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Con ten ts 3 Illustrated Parts Catalog 3.1 Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â1 3.2 Computer Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â2 3.3 Display Assembly Subcomponent s . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â12 3.4 Plastics Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â14 3.5 Cable Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â15 3.6 Mass Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â16 3.7 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â18 3.8 Sequential Part Number Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â20 4 Removal and Replacement Preliminaries 4.1 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â1 4.2 Service Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Plastic Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 4.3 Preventing Damage to Removable Drives . . . . . . . . 4â3 4.4 Preventing Electrostatic Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â4 4.5 Packaging and Transporting Precautions . . . . . . . . . 4â5 4.6 Workstation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â6 4.7 Grounding Equipment and Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â7
Cont ent s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de v 5 Removal and Replacement Procedures 5.1 Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â2 5.2 Disassembly Sequence Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â3 5.3 Preparing the Computer for Disassembly . . . . . . . . . 5â4 5.4 Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â6 5.5 Computer Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â9 5.6 Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â10 5.7 Mini Card Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â13 5.8 RTC Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â16 5.9 Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â17 5.10 Switch Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â20 5.11 Keyboard Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â22 5.12 LED Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â26 5.13 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â28 5.14 Display Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â30 5.15 Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â40 5.16 System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â47 5.17 Bluetooth Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â54 5.18 Modem Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â57 5.19 USB Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â59 5.20 Speaker Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â61 5.21 Fan/Heat Sink Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â64 5.22 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â70 5.23 PC Card Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â72
v i Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Con ten ts 6 Specifications A Connector Pin Assignments B Power Cord Set Requirements C Screw Listing D Display Component Recycling Index
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â1 1 Pr oduc t D esc ription The HP Pa vilion dv8300 Notebook PC offers adv a nced modularity , Intel® Pentium® M processors, and extensi ve multimedia support. HP P av ilion d v8 300 Notebook PC
1â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc r iption 1.1 F e a t u r e s â Intel Pentium M 2.17-, 2.0-, 1.83-GHz Single Code processors, or Intel Penti um M 1.66-GHz Dual Code processor , varying b y computer model â 17.0-inch, WSXGA , TFT (1680 à 1050) with BrightV iew or 17.0-inch, WXGA , TFT (1440 à 900) with BrightV iew display , v arying by computer model â 120-, 100-, or 80-GB high-capacity hard dri v e, v arying by computer model â 256-MB DDR1 synchronous DRAM (SDRAM) at 333 MHz, expandable to 2.0 GB â Microsoft® W indows® XP Home Edition or W indows XP Professional, v arying b y computer model â Full-size W indows k e yboard with full-size numeric ke ypad â T ouchPad pointing de vice, including dedicated v ertical scroll region â Integrated 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet local area network (LAN) netw ork interface card (NIC) with RJ-45 jack â Integrated high-speed 56K modem with RJ-11 jack â Integrated wireless support for Mini Card IEEE 802.11a/b/g WLAN de vice â Support for one T ype I or T ype II PC Card slot, with support for both 32-bit (CardBus) and 16-bit PC Cards â Support for ExpressCard slot
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â3 â External 90-watt A C adapter with 3-wire po wer cord â 8-cell Li-Ion battery pack â Stereo speakers â V olume up, v olume mute, and v olume do wn b uttons â QuickPlay b uttons â Support for the follo wing optical dri v es: â D VD±R W and CD-R W Double Layer Combo Dri ve with LightScribe â D VD±R W and CD-R W Double Layer Combo Dri ve â D VD/CD-R W Combo Dri ve â Connectors: â Audio-in (microphone) â Audio-out (headphone) â Digital Media Slot â Expansion port 2 â ExpressCard slot â External monitor â IEEE 1394 â PC Card â Po wer â RJ-11 (modem) â RJ-45 (network) â S-V ideo-out â Uni versal Serial Bus (USB) v . 2.0 (4 ports)
1â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc r iption 1 .2 R eset tin g t he C omp uter If the computer you are servicing has an unkno wn password, follo w these steps to clear the password. These steps also clear CMOS: 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3, âPreparing the Computer for Disassembly , â for more information). 2. Remov e the real-time clock (R TC) battery (refer to Section 5.8, âR TC Battery , â for more information on removing and replacing the R TC battery). 3. W ait approximately 5 minutes. 4. Replace the R TC battery and reassemble the computer . 5. Connect A C power to the computer . Do not reinsert any battery packs at this time. 6. T urn on the computer . All passwords and all CMOS settings ha v e been cleared.
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â5 1. 3 P o w e r M a n a g e m e n t The computer comes with po wer management features that extend battery operating time and conserv e po wer . The computer supports the follo wing po wer management features: â Standby â Hibernation â Setting customization by the user â Hotke ys for setting the le v el of performance â Battery calibration â Lid switch standby/resume â Po wer b utton â Adv anced Conf iguration and Po wer Management (A CPM) compliance
1â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc r iption 1 .4 Ex ternal C ompon ents The external components on the front of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-1. F r ont Components
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â7 Ta b l e 1 - 1 Fr ont Components Item Component Function 1P o w e r l i g h t â On: Computer is tur ned on. â Off: Computer is off or in hiber nation. â Blinking: Computer is in standby . 2B a t t e r y l i g h t â On: A batter y pack is charging or is close to full charge capacity . â Off: If the computer is plugged into an e xter nal pow er source, the light is turned off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an e xter nal po wer source, the light sta ys off until the batter y reaches a low-battery condition. â Blinking: A batter y pack that is the only av ailable pow er sour ce has reached a low-battery condition. When the batter y reaches a critical lo w-batter y condition, the batter y light begins blinking quic kly . 3 Drive light On or blinking: The internal hard dr iv e or an optical drive is being accessed. 4 Speakers Produce stereo sound. 5 Displa y release latch Opens the computer .
1â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc r iption The external components on the right side of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-2. R igh t-Side C ompo nents
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â9 Ta b l e 1 - 2 Right-Side Components Item Component Function 1 ExpressCard slot Suppor ts an optional ExpressCard. 2A u d i o - o u t (headphone) jack Connects an optional headphone or pow ered stereo speak ers. Also connects the audio function of an audio/video de vice , such as a tele vision or VCR. 3 A udio-in (microphone) jack Connects an optional stereo microphone. 4 USB por ts (2) Connect optional USB de vices. 5 Optical drive Suppor ts an optical disc, such as a CD or D VD .
1â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc r iption The external components on the left side of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-3. Lef t -S ide Com po ne nt s Ta b l e 1 - 3 Left-Side Components Item Component Function 1 P ower connector Connects the A C adapter cab le. 2 Monitor por t Connects an optional V GA monitor or projector . 3 S-Video-out jack Connects the vi deo function of an optional S-Video de vice, such as a tele vision, VCR, or video capture card. 4 RJ-45 (network) jack Connects a network cable (not included).
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â11 5 Expansion por t 2 Connects t he computer to an optional e xpansion product. â The computer has only one expansion port. The term expansion port 2 describes the type of expansion port. 6 USB por ts (2) Connect optional USB de vices. 7 1394 por t (4-pin) Connects an optional 1394a de vice such as a scanner , a digital camera, or a digital camcorder . 8 Digital Media Slot light On: An optional digital card is being accessed. 9 Digital Media Slot Suppor ts the follo wing optional digital cards: Secure Digital (SD) Memor y Card, SD I/O Card, Memor y Stick, Memory Stick Pro , MultiMediaCard, xD-Picture Card, and Smar tMedia. 10 PC Card slot Suppor ts an optional T ype I or T ype II 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Card. Ta b l e 1 - 3 Left-Side Components (Continued) Item Component Function
1â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc r iption The external components on the rear panel of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-4. Re a r P a ne l Co m p on e n t s
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â13 Ta b l e 1 - 4 Rear P anel Components Item Component Function 1 Security cable slot Attaches an op tional security cable to the computer . â The purpose of security solutions is to act as a deterrent. These solutions do not prevent the product from being mishandled or stolen. 2 RJ-11 (modem) jack Connects a modem cab le (not included). 3 Batter y ba y Holds a batter y pac k. 4 Wireless light On: One or mo re inter nal wireless de vices hav e been tur ned on. â To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up. 5 V ent Provides airflo w to cool internal components. Ã T o pre v ent ov erheating, do not obstruct vents . Do not allow a hard surf ace, such as a printer , or a soft surf ace, such as pillo ws or thick rugs or clothing, to bloc k airflow .
1â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc r iption The standard ke yboard components of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-5. St andar d K ey boar d Co mponents
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â15 T able 1-5 Standar d Ke yboar d Components Item Component Function 1 f1 to f12 ke ys (12) P erf or m system and application tasks. When combined with fn , function ke ys perf or m additional tasks as hotk eys . 2 caps lock ke y Enables caps loc k and turns on the caps loc k light. 3 fn ke y Combines with other ke ys to perf orm system tasks as hotke ys . F or e xample , pressing fn f7 decreases screen brightness. 4 Windows logo k e y Displa ys the Microsoft Windows Star t menu. 5W i n d o w s applications ke y Displa ys a shor tcut menu f or items beneath the pointer . 6 Arrow k e ys Mov e the cursor around the screen. 7 Numeric ke ypad ke ys (16) Can be used like the ke ys on an external numeric ke ypad. 8 num lock ke y Enables n umeric lock, tur ns on the embedded numeric ke ypad, and turns on the num loc k light.
1â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc r iption The computer top components are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-6. To p C o m p o n e n t s T able 1-6 T op Components Item Component Function 1 Displa y s witch Initiates standb y if the displa y is closed when the computer is on. 2 Wireless light On: One or more inter nal wireless de vices hav e been tur ned on. â To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up.
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â17 3 Wireless button T ur ns the wireless functionality on or off , but does not create a wireless connection. â To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up. 4P o w e r l i g h t â On: The computer is on. â Blinking: The computer is in standby . â Off: The computer is off or in hiber nation. P ower b utton When the computer is â Off , press to turn on the computer . â On, press to enter hiber nation. â In standby , briefly press to exit standb y . â In hiber nation, briefly press to exit hiber nation. If the computer ha s stopped responding and Microsoft® Windows® shutdo wn procedures cannot be used, press and hold the pow er button f or at least 5 seconds to tur n off the computer . 5 V olume down b utton Decreases speaker v olume. 6 V olume mute b utton Mutes or restores speaker v olume . 7 V olume up button Increases speaker v olume. T able 1-6 T op Components (Continued) Item Component Function
1â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc r iption The Quick Play and Quick Launch b uttons are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-7. To p C o m p o n e n t s
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â19 T able 1-7 Quic kPla y and Quick Launc h Button Components Item Component Function 1 D VD button Default button functions without Quic kPlay software: When the computer is â On: Opens the def ault D VD application to star t a D VD in the optical drive . â Off: No function. â In standby: Resumes from standb y into Windows . â In hiber nation: Restores from hiber nation into Windows . Button functions with QuickPla y software: When the computer is â On: Opens the def ault D VD application to star t a D VD in the optical drive . â Off: Opens QuickPla y to star t a D VD in the optical drive . â In standby: Resumes from standb y into Windows . â In hiber nation: Restores from hiber nation into Windows .
1â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc r iption 2 Media Button Default b utton functions without Quic kPlay software: When the computer is â On: Opens the music application or the Media menu, allo wing you to select a multimedia application. â Off: No function. â In standby: Resumes from standb y into Windows . â In hiber nation: Restores from hiber nation into Windows . Button functions with QuickPla y software: When the computer is â On: Opens the music application or the Media menu, allo wing you to select a multimedia application. â Off: Opens the music application or the Media menu, allo wing you to select a multimedia application. â In standby: Resumes from standb y into Windows . â In hiber nation: Restores from hiber nation into Windows . 3 Quick Launch calculator button Opens the Microsoft Windows calculator . This b utton can also be reassigned to an Inter net or network des tination or to an y software application or data file . â When you press the Quick Launch calculator button, num lock is enabled. T able 1-7 Quic kPla y and Quic k Launch Button Components (Continued) Item Component Function
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â21 The computer T ouchPad components are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-8. T ouchP ad Components T able 1-8 T ouchP ad Components Item Component Function 1 Left and right T ouchP ad buttons Function lik e the left and right buttons on an e xternal mouse. 2 T ouchP ad Mov es the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Can be set to perf or m other mouse functions, such as scrolling, selecting, and double-clic king. 3 T ouchP ad ver tical scroll zone Scrolls up or down.
1â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Pr oduct Desc r iption The external components on the bottom of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-9. Bottom Components Ta b l e 1 - 9 Bottom Components Item Component Function 1 Optical drive Suppor ts an optical disc, such as a C D o r DV D. 2 Labels area Contains the serial number and other inf ormation labels. 3 Batter y pac k release latch Releases a batter y pac k from the batter y ba y . 4 Batter y ba y Holds a batter y pac k.
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â2 3 5 V ents (2) Provide airflo w to cool inter nal components. Ã T o pre v ent ov erheating, do not obstruct vents . Do not allow a hard surf ace, such as a printer , or a soft surf ace, such as pillo ws or thick rugs or clothing, to b lock airflow . 6 Memor y/Mini Card module compar tment cov er â Contains 2 memor y module slots that suppor t replaceable memory modules. The n umber of preinstalled memor y modules v aries by computer model. â Holds an optional wireless LAN de vice (select models only). Ã T o pre v ent an unresponsiv e system and the displa y of a warning message, install only a Mini Card de vice authorized f or use in your computer b y the gov er nmental agency that regulates wireless de vices in your country . If y ou install an unauthorized de vice and then receiv e a warning message, remov e the de vice to restore computer functionality . Then contact Customer Care. 7 Hard drive ba y Holds the inter nal hard drive. Ta b l e 1 - 9 Bottom Components (Continued) Item Component Function
1â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Pr oduct Desc r iption 1. 5 D e s i g n O v e r v i e w This section presents a design ov ervie w of key parts and features of the computer . Refer to Chapter 3, âIllustrated Parts Catalog, â to identify replacement parts, and Chapter 5, âRemo v al and Replacement Procedures, â for disassembly steps. The system board provides the follo wing device connections: â Intel Pentium M processors â Audio â Digital media card â Display â ExpressCard â Hard dri v e â K e yboard â Memory module â Mini Card communications de vices â PC Card â To u c h P a d à CA UTION: T o pr operl y v entilate the com puter , allo w at least a 7 .6 -cm (3-inc h) c lear ance on the left and r igh t sides o f the compu ter . The computer uses an electric fan for v entilation. The fan is controlled by a temperature sensor and is designed to be turned on automatically when high temperature conditions exist. These conditions are af fected b y high external temperatures, system po wer consumption, po wer management/battery conserv ation conf igurations, battery fast char ging, and software applications. Exhaust air is displaced through the ventilation grill located on the left side of the computer .
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â1 2 T r oubl eshooting à W ARN ING: Only author i z ed tec hnic ians trained b y HP should repair this equipmen t . All tr ouble shooting and r epair pr ocedur es ar e detailed to allo w onl y subas sembl y-/module -lev el r epair . Becaus e of the comple x ity of the indi v idual boar ds and suba ssembli es , do not attempt to mak e r epair s at the component le v el or modif i cations to an y print ed w ir ing boar d. Im pr oper r epairs can c r eate a safety ha z ard . An y indicati on of component r eplacement or pr inted w ir ing boar d modif icati on may v oid an y warr ant y or e x change allo wances . 2. 1 C omp uter Setu p Computer Setup is a preinstalled, R OM-based utility that can be used e ven when the operating system is not w orking or will not load. If the operating system is working, the computer restarts the operating system after you exit Computer Setup. â Pointing de vices are not supporte d in Computer Setup; you must use the ke yboard to na vigate and make selections. The menu tables later in this chapter provide an o v ervie w of Computer Setup options.
2â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T roubleshooting Acce ssing Compute r Set up The information and settings in Computer Setup are accessed from the File, Security , T ools, and Advanced menus. 1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer . Press f10 while the F10 = Based Setup message is displayed in the lo wer -left corner of the screen. â T o change the language, press f2 . â T o view na vigation information, press f1 . â T o return to the Computer Setup menu, press esc . 2. Select the File , Security , T o ols , or Advanced menu. 3. T o exit Computer Setup, choose one of the follo wing: â T o exit without sa ving any changes, use the arro w keys to select File > Ignor e changes and exit , and then follo w the instructions on the screen. â T o exit and sa ve all the settings you ha ve entered, use the arro w ke ys to select File > Sa ve changes and exit , and then follo w the instructions on the screen. Y our preferences are set when you e xit Computer Setup and go into ef fect when the computer restarts. Com pu ter Setup Defaults T o return all settings in Computer Setup to the v alues that were set at the factory: 1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer . Press f10 while the F10 = Based Setup message is displayed in the lo wer -left corner of the screen. â T o change the language, press f2 . â T o view na vigation information, press f1 . 2. Use the arro w ke ys to select File > Restor e defaults . 3. Select the Restore Defaults check box.
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â3 4. T o confirm the restoration, press f10 . 5. Select File > Sa ve changes and exit , and then follo w the instructions on the screen. When the computer restarts, the factory settings are restored, and any identif ication information you hav e entered is sa ved. Selecti ng fr om the F ile Me nu Ta b l e 2 - 1 File Menu Select T o Do This System Inf or mation â Vie w identification inf or mation about the computer and any battery packs in the system. â Vie w specification inf or mation about the processor , memor y and cache size, video re vision, ke yboard controller version, and system ROM. Sav e to floppy Sav e system configuration settings to a diskette . Restore to flopp y Restore system configuration settings from a diskette . Restore def aults Replace configurat ion settings in Computer Setup with f actor y def ault se ttings. (Identification inf or mation is retained.) Ignore changes and e xit Cancel ch anges entered during the current session. Then e xit an d restar t the computer . Sav e changes and exit Sav e changes entered during the current session. Then e xit and restar t t he computer . The changes you sa v e are to into ef f ect when the computer restar ts.
2â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T roubleshooting Selec ting from the Sec urity Menu Ta b l e 2 - 2 Security Menu Select T o Do This Administrator pass word Enter , change , or delete an HP Administrator pass word. P ower-on pass word Enter , change, or delete a pow er-on pass word. P a ss word options â Enable/Disab le stringent securi ty . â Enable/Disab le required pass word on restar t. DriveLoc k pass words Enable/disab le DriveLoc k; change a Dr iv eLock user or master pass word. â DriveLock Settings are accessible only when you enter Comput er Setup by turning on (not restarting) the computer. Smar t Card Secur ity Enable/disab le po wer-on suppor t f or smar t cards. â This f eature is suppor ted by select smar t card readers only . Embedded Security â Enab le/Disable the embedded security chip . â Restore embedded security chip to factory settings. â Enable/Disab le po wer-on authentication suppor t. â Enable/Disab le automatic DriveLoc k. â Reset pow er-on authen tication credential â Embedded Security settings are accessible only if the computer is equipped with an embedded security chip. De vice security Enable/Disab le de vices in the system. Enable NIC f or inclusion in MultiBoot. System IDs Enter user-defin ed identification v alues.
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â5 Selec ting fr om t he T ools Menu Ta b l e 2 - 3 To o l s M e n u Select T o Do This HDD Self T est options Run a quic k or comprehensiv e self-test on any hard drive in the system. Batter y Inf or mation Vie w inf or mation about any battery packs in the computer . Memor y Check â Run a self-test on memor y modules in the computer . â Vie w inf or mation about memor y modules installed in the computer .
2â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T roubleshooting Selec ting from th e Ad v anced Menu Ta b l e 2 - 4 Adv anced Menu Select T o Do This Language (or press f2 ) Change the Computer Setup language . Boot options â Enable/Disab le MultiBoot, which sets a star tup sequence that can include most bootable de vices and media in the system. â Set the boot order . De vice options â Swap the functions of the fn k e y and left ctrl key . â Enable/Disab le multiple pointing de vices at star tup . (T o set the comp uter to suppor t only a single, usually nonstandard, pointing de vice at star tup , select Disable .) â Enable/Disab le USB legacy suppor t f or a USB ke yboard, mouse , and hu b . When USB legacy suppor t is enabled â A USB k eyboard, mouse , and hub work e v en when a Windows oper ating system is not loaded. â The computer star ts from a bootable hard drive , diskette driv e diskette , or CD , CD-R W , or D VD inser ted into a dr ive connected b y a USB connector to the computer or to an optional docking de vice . â Select a parallel por t mode: EPP (Enhanced P a rallel P or t), standard, bidirectional, or ECP (Enhanced Capabilities P or t). â Enable/Disab le all settings in the SpeedStep window . (When Disable is selected, the computer runs in Ba tter y Optimized mode.)
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â7 2.2 T roubl eshooting Flo wc har ts Ta b l e 2 - 5 T roubleshooting Flo wch ar ts Overview Flowchart Description 2.1 âFlowchar t 2.1âInitial T roub leshootingâ 2.2 âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ower , P ar t 1â 2.3 âFlowchar t 2.3âNo P ower , P ar t 2â 2.4 âFlowchar t 2.4âNo P ower , P ar t 3â 2.5 âFlowchar t 2.5âNo P ower , P ar t 4â 2.6 âFlowchar t 2.6âNo Video , P ar t 1â 2.7 âFlowchar t 2.7âNo Video , P ar t 2â 2.8 âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Do c king De vice (if applicab le)â 2.9 âFlowchar t 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loadingâ 2.10 âFlowchar t 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 1â 2.11 âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 2â 2.12 âFlowchar t 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 3â 2.13 âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Disk ette Dr iv eâ
2â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T roubleshooting Flowchart Description 2.14 âFlowchar t 2.14âNo OS Loading, Optical Driveâ 2.15 âFlowchar t 2.15âNo A udio , P ar t 1â 2.16 âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , P ar t 2â 2.17 âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De viceâ 2.18 âFlowchar t 2.18âNonfunctioning K eyboardâ 2.19 âFlowchar t 2.19âNonfunctioning P ointing Deviceâ 2.20 âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connectionâ Ta b l e 2 - 5 T roubleshooting Flo wc har ts Overview (Continued)
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â9 Flo wc h art 2. 1âInitial T roub leshootin g Connecting to network or modem? Begin troubleshooting. Is there power? Is the OS loading? Is there video? (no boot) Is there sound? Beeps, LEDs, or error messages? Keyboard/ pointing device working? Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunc- tioning De vice. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ower , Pa r t 1 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â All drives working? Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N End N N N Go to âFlowchar t 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loading. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.15âNo A udio , Pa r t 1 . â Go to âFlowchart 2.18âNonfunc- tioning K e yboardâ or âFlowchart 2.19âNonfunc- tioning P ointing De vice. â Check LED board, speaker connections. Go to âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connection. â
2â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T roubleshooting Flo wc h art 2.2âN o P ow er , P ar t 1 1. Reseat the power cables in the docking device and at the AC outlet. 2. Ensure the AC power source is active. 3. Ensure that the power strip is working. Done Remove from docking device (if applicable). Po we r up on batter y power? Po we r up on AC power? Power up in docking device? Po we r u p on batter y power? Po we r up in docking device? Done Reset power .* Reset power .* Po we r up on AC power? N Y Y N N Y N N Y Y YN 1. On select models, there is a separate reset button. 2. On select models, the computer can be reset using the standby switch and either the lid switch or the main power switch. *NOTES Go to âFlowchart 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.3âNo P ower , Pa r t 2 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Docking De vice (if applicable). â No power (power LED is off).
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â11 Flo wc h ar t 2.3âNo P o w er , P ar t 2 Continued from âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ower , Pa r t 1 . â Visually check for debris in batter y socket and cl ean if necessary . Done N Y Po we r on ? Check batter y by recharging it, moving it to another computer , or replacing it. Po we r on ? Done Y Replace power supply (if applicable). N Po we r on ? Done Y N Go to âFlowchart 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â
2â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T roubleshooting Flo wc h art 2.4âN o P ow er , P ar t 3 Continued from âFlowchart 2.3âNo P ower , Pa r t 2 . â Reseat AC adapter in computer and at po wer sou rc e. Internal or external AC adapter? Done Done Done Done Po we r on ? Po we r on ? Po we r on ? Plug directly into AC outlet. Po we r LE D on? Po we r ou tl e t active? T r y different outlet. Replace external AC adapter . Replace power cord. Y N Y Y Y Y N N N N External Internal Go to âFlowchar t 2.5âNo P ower , Pa r t 4 . â
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â13 Flowc h ar t 2.5 âN o P ow e r , P ar t 4 Y N Continued from âFlowchar t 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â Reseat loose components and boards and replace damaged items. Open computer . Loose or damaged parts? Y Close computer and retest. Po we r on ? Done N Replace the following items (if applicable). Check computer operation after each replacement: 1. Internal DC-DC converter* 2. Internal AC adapter 3. Processor board* 4. System board* *NOTE: Replace these items as a set to prevent shorting out among components.
2â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T roubleshooting Flo wc h art 2.6âN o Video, P ar t 1 A N Stand-alone or docking device? No video. Replace the following one at a time . T est after each replacement. 1. Cable between computer and co mputer display (if applicable) 2. Display 3. System board Internal or external display*? Adjust brightness. Video OK? Done Docking device Internal Stand-alone External Adjust brightness. Video OK? Done Y Press lid swi tc h to en su re operation. Video OK? Done Y N Video OK? Done Done N Check for bent pins on cable. Tr y another display . Internal and external video OK? Replace system board. YY N N *NOTE: T o change from internal to external display , use the hotkey . Y Go to âFlowchar t 2.7âNo Video , Pa r t 2 . â
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â15 Flo wc h art 2.7âN o Video, P ar t 2 Y N Continued from âFlowchart 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â Done Adjust external monitor display . Video OK? Adjust display brightness. Video OK? Video OK? Done Done Check that computer is properly seated in docking device, for bent pins on cable, and for monitor connection. Go to âA â in âFlowchart 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â Check brightness of external monitor . T r y another external monitor . Internal and external video OK? Go to âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Docking De vice (if applicable). â Y Y Y N N N Remove computer from docking device, if connected.
2â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T roubleshooting F l o wch a rt 2 .8 â N on fu nct i o n in g D o ck i ng De v i c e (i f appl icable) Y N Reseat power cord in docking device and power outlet. N Check voltage setting on docking device. Reset monitor cable connector at docking device. Reinstall computer into docking device. Docking device operating? Docking device operating? Done Done Y Nonfunctioning docking device. Remove computer , replace docking device. T est replacement docking device with new computer .
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â17 Flo wc h art 2.9âN o Opera ting S y stem (OS) Loadin g No OS loading from hard drive, go to âFlowchart 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 1. â Reseat power cord in docking device and power outlet. No OS loading.* *NOTE: Before beginning troubleshooting, always check cable connections, cable ends, and drives for bent or damaged pins. No OS loading from diskette drive, go to âFlowchart 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â No OS loading from optical drive, go to âFlowchar t 2.14âNo OS Loading, Optical Drive . â No OS loading from network, go to âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connection. â
2â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T roubleshooting Flo wc h ar t 2. 1 0âNo OS Load ing , Hard Driv e, Pa r t 1 Go to âFlowchart 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Y Done N OS not loading from hard drive. Nonsystem disk message? Go to âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 2. â Reseat external hard drive. OS loading? Done Boot from CD? Go to âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â Boot from hard drive? Boot from diskette? Change boot priority through the setup utility and reboot. Boot from hard drive? Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Check the setup utility for correct booting order .
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â19 Flowc h ar t 2. 1 1âN o OS L oa di n g , H ard D riv e, Pa r t 2 Load OS using Operating System disc (if applicable). Continued from âFlowchar t 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 1. â Reseat hard drive. Done Disc or diskette in drive? 1. Replace hard drive. 2. Replace system board. Go to âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â Format hard drive and bring to ab o o t a b l e C:\ prompt. Create partition, and then format hard drive to bootable C:\ prompt. Boot from diskette drive? Remove disc or diskette and reboot. Y N Boot from hard drive? Y N Y N Hard drive accessible? Y N Hard drive accessible? Done Run FDISK. Y N Hard drive partitioned? Hard drive formatted? Y N Y N Computer booted? Done Y N Go to âFlowchart 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 3. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 3. â
2â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T roubleshooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 2âNo OS Loadin g, Hard Driv e, Pa r t 3 Y System files on hard drive? Continued from âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 2. â Clean virus. Done N Install OS and reboot. Virus on hard drive? OS loading from hard drive? Y N Y N Y N Diagnostics on disc or diskette? Replace hard drive. Run diagnostics and follow recommendations. Run SCANDISK and check for bad sectors. Can bad sectors be fixed? Replace hard drive. Y N Y N Fix ba d sectors. Boot from hard drive? Replace hard drive. Done
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â21 Flo wc h art 2. 1 3âNo OS Loadin g , Disk et te Driv e Replace the following components individually , retesting after each replacement: â Diskette drive â System board Done Y N Reseat diskette drive. OS not loading from diskette drive. Done Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N OS loading? Nonsystem disk message? Bootable diskette in drive? Install bootable diskette and reboot computer . Check diskette for system files. Tr y d i f f e r e n t diskette. Nonsystem disk error? OS loading? Boot from another device? Enable drive and cold boot computer . Is diskette drive boot order correct? Change boot priority using the setup utility . Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunc- tioning De vice. â Diskette drive enabled in the Setup utility? Go to âFlowchart 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Reset the computer . Refer to Section 1.2, âResetting the Computer , â for instructions.
2â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide T roubleshooting Flo wc h ar t 2. 1 4âN o OS Loadin g, O pti cal Driv e Y Done N Bootable disc in drive? Disc in drive? No OS loading from CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive. Install bootable disc and reboot computer . Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Install bootable disc. Boots from CD or DVD? Boots from CD or DVD? T r y another bootable disc. Booting from another device? Booting order correct? Correct boot order using the setup utility . Done Reseat drive. Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Reset the computer . Refer to Section 1.2, âResetting the Computer , â for instructions.
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â2 3 Flo wc h ar t 2. 1 5 âNo Audio, P art 1 No audio. N Computer in docking device (if applicable)? Internal audio? Audio? Done Undock Audio? Done T urn up audio internally or externally . Go to âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , Pa r t 2 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â T est replacement docking device with new computer . Y Y Y Y N N N Go to âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , Pa r t 2 . â
2â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide T roubleshooting Flo wc h ar t 2. 1 6âNo Au dio, P ar t 2 YN Continued from âFlowchart 2.15âNo A udio , Pa r t 1 . â Reload audio drivers. Audio driver in OS configured? Audio? Y Y Y N N N Correct drivers for application? Connect to external speaker . Load drivers and set configuration in OS. Audio? Done Replace audio board and speaker connections in computer (if applicable). Replace the following components individually , retesting after each replacement: â Internal speakers. â Audio board (if applicable).
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â2 5 Flo wc h art 2. 1 7âN onfunc tioning D e vice Done Any physical device detected? Y N Unplug the nonfunctioning device from the computer and inspect cables and plugs for bent or broken pins or other damage. Reseat device. Clear CMOS. Done Fix o r replace broken item. Nonfunctioning device. Reattach device. Close computer , plug in power , and reboot. Device boots properly? Go to âFlowchart 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loading. â Device boots properly? Replace hard drive. Replace diskette drive. Replace NIC. If integrated NIC, replace system board. Y N Y N
2â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide T roubleshooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 8âNonfunc tionin g K e yboard Y N Keyboard operating properly? Keyboard not operating properly . External device works? Replace system board. Replace system board. Connect computer to good external keyboard. Reseat internal keyboard connector (if applicable). Replace internal keyboard or cable. Y N Y N Done Done Keyboard operating properly?
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â2 7 Flo wc h art 2. 1 9âNonfunc tioning P oin ting De vic e Y N Pointing device not operating properly . External device works? Replace system board. Replace system board. Connect computer to good external pointing device. Reseat internal pointing device connector (if applicable). Replace internal pointing device or cable. Y N Y N Done Done Poi n ti ng d ev i ce operating properly? Poi n ti ng d ev i ce operating properly?
2â2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide T roubleshooting Flo wc h art 2.20âNo Net w or k/Modem Conn ectio n Y Disconnect all power from the computer and open. No network or modem connection. N Done Digital line? Network or modem jack active? Replace jack or have jack activated. Connect to nondigital line. NIC/modem configured in OS? Reload drivers and reconfigure. Reseat NIC/modem (if applicable). Replace NIC/modem (if applicable). Replace system board. Done N N N N Y Y Y Y Network or modem connection working? Network or modem connection working?
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â1 3 I llus trated P ar ts C a talog This chapter provides an illustrated parts breakdo wn and a reference for spare part numbers. 3. 1 S erial N umber Location When ordering parts or requesting information, provide the computer serial number and model number located on the bottom of the computer . Ser ial Numb er L ocation
3â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P ar ts Catalog 3.2 Comp uter M ajor Com ponen ts Com put er Ma jor Com po ne nt s
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â3 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components Item Description Spare P art Number 1 Displa y assemblies (include displa y cab le, wireless antenna boards , and antenna cables) 17-inch, WXGA Dual Lamp 17-inch, WSXGA with BrightView 17-inch, WXGA with BrightView 408486-001 403797-001 403796-001 â Refer to Section 3.3, âDispla y Assemb ly Subcomponents, â for display assembly internal co mponent spare part number information. 2 Switch co ver (includes LED board and LED board cab le) 403817-001 3 K eyboar d assembl y frame 403818-001 4 LED boar d (includes LED board cable) 408494-001 5 K eyboar ds Belgium Europe Fr a n c e F rench Canada Ger many Greece Israel Italy Ko r e a Latin America The Netherlands Norwa y 403809-A41 403809-021 403809-051 403809-121 403809-041 403809-151 403809-BB1 403809-061 403809-AD1 403809-161 403809-331 403809-091 P or tugal Saudi Arabia Spain Sweden and Finland Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 403809-131 403809-171 403809-071 403809-B71 403809-111 403809-141 403809-031 403809-001 6 T op co ver (includes T ouchP ad) 403822-001
3â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P ar ts Catalog Com put er Major C om ponents
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â5 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 7 Bracket Kit , includes: Displa y hinge suppor t brack et Not illustrated: Optical drive brac ket (also included with optical drive spare par t kits) Hard drive brac ket (also included with hard drive spare par t kits) Expansion por t 2 brack et T ouchP ad brack et (also included with top cov er spare par t kits) 403816-001 8 Speaker assembl y 403825-001 9 Expansion port 2 bracket 407863-001 10 System board 407758-001 11 Optical drives D VD±RW and CD-R W Double La yer Combo Drive with LightScribe D VD±RW and CD-R W Double La yer Combo Drive D VD/CD-RW Combo Driv e 403807-001 403806-001 403805-001 12 Fa n/heat sink assembly (includes thermal paste) 407862-001 13 USB board (includes USB board and USB board cable) 408491-001 14 Optical drive connector board 408491-001 15 Processor s (include ther mal paste) Intel P entium M 21.7-GHZ Intel P entium M 2.0-GHz Intel P entium M 1.83-GHz Intel P entium M 66-GHz Dual Code 407763-001 407662-001 407661-001 407660-001
3â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P ar ts Catalog Com put er Major C om ponents
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â7 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 16 ExpressCar d assembl y 403828-001 Plastics Kit 415692-001 17a 17b 17c 17d Includes: ExpressCard slot bezel PC Card slot bezel Hard drive co v er (includes 3 captive scre w s) Memor y/Mini Card module co mpar tment cov er (includes 2c a p t i v es c r e w s ) Computer f eet (not illustrated) 18 R TC battery 403819-001 19 Bluetooth® module (includes Bluetooth module cab le) 397922-001 20 PC Car d assembl y 403835-001 21 Base enc losure 403824-001 22 Har d drives (include fr ame and connector) 7200 r pm, 100-GB 410197-001 5400 r pm, 120-GB 5400 r pm, 100-GB 5400 r pm, 80-GB 410198-001 407770-001 407847-001 23 8-cell, 4.4-hour battery pack 403808-001
3â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P ar ts Catalog Com put er Major C om ponents
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â9 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 24 Mini Car d modules 802.11a/b/g WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countries are categor ized as most of the world (MO W) 1. 407576-001 Antigua and Barbuda Argentina A ustralia Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Republic Guam Guatemala Hong K ong Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico Ne w Zealand Pa r a g u a y Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam 802.11a/b/g WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countries are categor ized as MO W 2. 407576-002 Aruba A ustria Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan
3â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P ar ts Catalog Com put er Major C om ponents
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â11 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 24 Mini Car d modules (continued) 802.11a/b/g WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countries are categor ized as the rest of the world (RO W). 407576-003 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K o rea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11b/g WLAN module f or use in the f ollowing countries: 409250-004 Jordan Israel Ku w a i t Thailand United Arab Emirates Ukraine 25 Memory modules (1 DIMM) PC2-5300 1024 MB 512 MB 409060-001 409059-001 PC2-4200 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 407767-001 407766-001 403573-001
3â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P ar ts Catalog 3. 3 Dis p lay Assembly Subcompon ents
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â13 T able 3-2 Displa y Assembl y Subcomponent Spare P art Number Information Item Description Spare P art Number 1a 1b Display Plastics Kit F or use with Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies F or use with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemblies Includes: â Displa y bezel â Displa y enclosure â Displa y release latch actuator and hooks (not illustrated) 412269-001 403881-001 2 Display Hinge Kit F or use with Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies F or use with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemblies 412270-001 403884-001 3 Display in ver ter boar ds: F or use with Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies F or use with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemblies 412268-001 403831-001 4 Display P anel Kit (includes display panel cab le) F or use with Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies F or use with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemblies 412271-001 403885-001 5 Wireless Antenna Kit (includes cable and transceiv ers) 403882-001 Display Label Kit (not illustrated) 403887-001 Display Scre w Kit (not illustr ated), includes: â Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 scre ws â Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 scre ws â Rubber scre w cov ers 403886-001
3â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P ar ts Catalog 3.4 P l as tic s Kit T able 3-3 Plastics Kit Spare P art Number Information Item Description Spare P art Number Plastics Kit , includes: 415692-001 1 Memor y module/Mini Card module compar tment cov er (includes 2 captiv e screws , secured b y C-clips) 2 Hard drive co v er (includes 3 capt iv e screws , secured b y C-clips) 3 Computer f eet (6) 4 ExpressCard slot bezel 5 PC Card slot bezel
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â15 3.5 Ca bl e Kit Ta b l e 3 - 4 Cable Kit Spare P art Number Information Item Description Spare P art Number Cable Kit , includes: 403814-001 1 T ouchP ad cab le 2 Modem cable 3 Bluetooth module cable 4 USB board cable 5 P o wer connector cab le
3â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P ar ts Catalog 3.6 M a s s St or a g e De vi ce s
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â17 Ta b l e 3 - 5 Mass Storage Devices Spare P art Number Information Item Description Spare P art Number 1 Har d drives (include frame and connector) 7200 r pm, 100-GB 410 197-001 5400 r pm, 120-GB 5400 r pm, 100-GB 5400 r pm, 80-GB 410198-001 407770-001 407847-001 2 Optical drives D VD±RW and CD-R W Double La y er Combo Drive with LightScribe D VD±RW and CD-R W Double La y er Combo Drive D VD/CD-RW Combo Driv e 403807-001 403806-001 403805-001 USB digital drive (not illustrated) 364727-001
3â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P ar ts Catalog 3.7 Miscell an eous (Not I llus trated) Ta b l e 3 - 6 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) Spare P art Information Description Spare P art Number Composite S-Video and audio cable 407939-001 D VB-T TV tuner 412475-001 D VB-T TV tuner antenna and adapter 412176-001 HP Mobile Remote Contr ol 407313-001 Remote TV tuner 407941-001 and 408479 RF cable 408485-001 RF input adapter 407940-001 USB infrared receiver 408483-001 Screw Kit (includes the f ollowing screws; ref er to Appendix C , âScrew Listing, â f or more inf ormation on specifications and usage) 403813-001 â Phillips PM3.0Ã4.0 screw â Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 scre w â Phillips PM2.5Ã9.0 screw â Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 screw â Black Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre w â Silv er Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 screw â Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 screw â Slotted M1.5Ã9.0 screw USB travel mouse 375269-001 USB digital drive 364727-001 Wired headset with v olume contr ol 371693-001
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â19 P ower supplies: 90-watt, PFC 408847-001 90-watt, non-PFC 408488-011 Po w e r c o r d s Fo r u s e i n : A ustralia 403811-011 Canada, F rench Canada, and the United States 403811-001 Denmark 403811-081 F rance, Germany , and Spain 403811-021 Israel 403811-BB1 Italy 403811-061 K o rea 403811-AD1 Switzerland 403811-111 The United Kingdom 403811-031 Ta b l e 3 - 6 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) Spare P art Information (Continued) Description Spare P art Number
3â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P ar ts Catalog 3.8 Sequ enti al P ar t Number Lis tin g Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P art Number Listing Spare P art Number Description 364727-001 USB digital dr iv e 371693-001 Wired headset with volume control 375269-001 USB trav el mouse 397922-001 Bluetooth wireless module (includes Bluetooth module cable) 403573-001 1 DIMM, PC-4200 256-MB memor y module 403796-001 17-inch, WXGA with Br ig htVie w displa y assemb ly (includes displa y cab le, wireless antenna boards , and antenna cab les) 403797-001 17-inch, WSXGA with Br ig htVie w displa y assemb ly (includes displa y cab le, wireless antenna boards , and antenna cab les) 403805-001 D VD/CD-R W Combo Drive 403806-001 D VD±R W and CD-R W Doub le La yer Combo Driv e 403807-001 D VD±R W and CD-R W Doub le La yer Combo Driv e with LightScribe 403808-001 8-cell, 4.4-hour batter y pack 403809-001 K e yboard f or us e in the United States 403809-021 K eyboard f or use inter nationally 403809-031 K e yboard f or use in the United Kingdom 403809-041 K eyboard f or use in F rance 403809-051 K eyboard f o r use in Ger many 403809-061 K e yboard f or use in Italy 403809-071 K eyboard f or use in Spain 403809-081 K eyboard f or use in Denmar k
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â21 403809-091 K eyboard f or use in Norwa y 403809-111 K eyboard f or use in Switzerland 403809-121 K eyboard f or use in F rench Canada 403809-131 K eyboard f o r use in P or tugal 403809-141 K e yboard f or use in T urke y 403809-151 K eyboard f or use in Greece 403809-161 K eyboard f or use in Latin Amer ica 403809-171 K eyboard f or use in Saudi Arabia 403809-331 K e yboard f or us e in the Netherlands 403809-A41 K eyboard f o r use in Belgium 403809-AD1 K eyboard f or use in K orea 403809-B71 K eyboard f or use in Sweden and Finland 403809-BB1 K eyboard f or use in Israel 403811-001 P ower cord f or use in the United States 403811-011 P ower cord f or use in A ustralia 403811-021 P ower cord f or use Inter nationally 403811-031 P ower cord f or use in the United Kingdom 403811-061 P ower cord f or use in Italy 403811-081 P ower cord f or use in Denmark 403811-111 P ower cord f or use in Switz erl and 403811-AD1 P ower cord f or use in K orea 403811-BB1 P ower cord f or use in Israel Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Illustrated P ar ts Catalog 403813-001 Screw Kit 403814-001 Cable Kit 403815-001 P ad Kit 403816-001 Brack et Kit 403817-001 Switch cov er (include s LED board and LED board cable) 403818-001 K eyboard assemb ly frame 403819-001 RTC battery 403822-001 T op cov er (includes T ouchP ad) 403824-001 Base enclosure 403825-001 Speaker assemb ly 403828-001 ExpressCard assembly 403831-001 Display in v er ter board fo r use with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies 403835-001 PC Card assembly 403881-001 Display Plastics Kit f or use with non-Dual Lamp display assemb lies 403882-001 Wireless Antenna Kit Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â2 3 403884-001 Display Hinge Kit f or us e with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies 403885-001 Display P anel Kit f or us e with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies 403886-001 Display Scre w Kit 403887-001 Display Label Kit 405936-001 90-watt PFC pow er adapter 407313-001 HP remote control 407316-001 512-MB SD Card memor y module 407576-001 802.11a/b/g WLAN Mini Card module for use in the f ollowing MO W 1 categor y countries: Antigua and Barb uda Argentina A ustralia Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Republic Guam Guatemala Hong K ong Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico New Zealand Pa r a g u a y Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Illustrated P ar ts Catalog 407576-002 802.11a/b/g WLAN Mini Card module for use in the f ollowing MO W 2 categor y countries: Aruba A ustria Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Lithuania Liechtenstein Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 407576-003 802.11a/b/g WLAN Mini Card module for use in the f ollowing RO W categor y countr ies: China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 407758-001 System board 407760-001 Intel P entium M 66 -GHz Dual Code processor 407761-001 Intel P entium M 1.83-GHz processor Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â2 5 407762-001 Intel P entium M 2.0-GHz processor 407763-001 Intel P entium M 21.7-GHZ processor 407766-001 1 DIMM, PC2-4200 512-MB memor y module 407767-001 1 DIMM, PC2-4200 1024-MB memor y module 407770-001 5400 r pm, 100-GB hard dr iv e (includes frame and connector) 407847-001 5400 r pm, 80-GB hard dr iv e (includes frame and connector) 407862-001 F an/heat sink asse mb ly (includes thermal paste) 407863-001 Expansion por t 2 brac k et 407939-001 Composite S- Video and audio cable 407940-001 RF input adapter cable 407941-001 TV tuner remote 408479-001 TV tuner remote 408483-001 USB infrared receiv er 408485-001 RF cable 408486-001 17-inch, WXGA Dual La mp display assemb ly (includes displa y cab le, wireless antenna boards , and antenna cab les) 408487-001 90-watt PFC A C adapter 408488-001 90-watt non-PFC A C adapter 408491-001 Optical dr iv e connector board 408492-001 USB board (includes USB board and USB board cable) 408494-001 LED board (includes LED board cable) 409059-001 1 DIMM, PC2-5300 512-GB memor y module 409060-001 1 DIMM, PC2-5300 1024-GB memor y module Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Illustrated P ar ts Catalog 409250-004 802.11b/g WLAN Mini Card module for use in the f ollowing countries: Jordan Israel Ku w a i t Thailand United Arab Emirates Ukraine 410197-001 7200 r pm, 100-GB hard dr iv e (includes frame and connector) 410198-001 5400 r pm, 120-GB hard dr iv e (includes frame and connector) 412175-001 D VB-T TV tuner 412176-001 D VB-T tuner antenna and adapter 412268-001 Display in v er ter board f or use with Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies 412269-001 Display Plastics Kit f or use with Dual Lamp display assemb lies 412270-001 Display Hinge Kit f or use with Dual Lamp display assemb lies 412271-001 Display P anel Kit f or use with Dual Lamp displa y assemblies 414226-001 F an assemb ly 415692-001 Plastics Kit Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 4â1 4 Remo v a l and Repl a cemen t Preliminaries This chapter provides essential information for proper and safe remov al and replacement service. 4. 1 T ools Required Y ou will need the follo wing tools to complete the remov al and replacement procedures: â Magnetic scre wdri ver â Phillips P0 scre wdri v er â Flat-bladed scre wdri v er â T ool kitâincludes connector remov al tool, loopback plugs, and case utility tool
4â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminari es 4.2 Ser vice C onsidera tions The follo wing sections include some of the considerations that you should keep in mind during disassembly and assembly procedures. â As you remov e each subassembly from the computer , place the subassembly (and all accompanying scre ws) away from the work area to pre v ent damage. Pl a s t i c Pa r t s Using excessi ve force during disassembly and reassembly can damage plastic parts. Use care when handling the plastic parts. Apply pressure only at the points designated in the maintenance instructions. Ca bl es and C onnec tors à CA UTION: When servic ing t he computer , ensure that cables are placed in their pr oper locations dur ing the r eas sembl y pr oces s. Impr oper ca ble placement can damage the com puter . Cables must be handled with extreme care to a void damage. Apply only the tension required to unseat or seat the cables during remov al and insertion. Handle cables by the connector whene ver possible. In all cases, a void bending, twisting, or tearing cables. Ensure that cables are routed in such a way that they cannot be caught or snagged b y parts being remo ved or replaced. Handle flex cables w ith e xtreme care; these cables tear easily .
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr eliminaries Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 4â3 4. 3 P r e v ent ing Da mage t o R emo v able D ri v es Remov able driv es are fragile components that must be handled with care. T o prev ent damage to the computer , damage to a remov able driv e, or loss of information, observ e the follo wing precautions: â Before removing or inserting a hard dri ve, shut do wn the computer . If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it do wn through the operating system. â Before removing a disk ette dri v e or optical dri ve, ensure that a diskette or disc is not in the dri ve and ensure that the optical dri ve tray is closed. â Before handling a dri ve, ensure that you are dischar ged of static electricity . While handling a dri ve, a v oid touching the connector . â Handle dri ves on surf aces co vered with at least one inch of shock-proof foam. â A v oid dropping dri v es from any height onto an y surf ace. â After removing a hard dri ve, an optical dri v e or a diskette dri ve, place it in a static-proof bag. â A v oid exposing a hard dri ve to products that ha ve magnetic f ields, such as monitors or speakers. â A v oid exposing a dri ve to temperature e xtremes or liquids. â If a dri ve must be mailed, place the dri ve in a b ubble pack mailer or other suitable form of protecti ve packaging and label the package âFRA GILE: Handle W ith Care. â
4â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminari es 4.4 Pr e v entin g Elec trosta tic D ama ge Many electronic components are sensiti ve to electrostatic dischar ge (ESD). Circuitry design and structure determine the degree of sensiti vity . Networks b uilt into man y integrated circuits provide some protection, b ut in many cases, the dischar ge contains enough po wer to alter de vice parameters or melt silicon junctions. A sudden dischar ge of static electricity from a finger or other conductor can destroy static-sensiti ve de vices or microcircuitry . Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, b ut damage occurs. An electronic de vice e xposed to electrostatic dischar ge may not be af fected at all and can work perfectly throughout a normal cycle. Or the de vice may function normally for a while, then degrade in the internal layers, reducing its life e xpectanc y .
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr eliminaries Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 4â5 4.5 P ac k agin g and T ranspor tin g Precautions Use the follo wing grounding precautions when packaging and transporting equipment: â T o av oid hand contact, transport products in static-safe containers, such as tubes, bags, or boxes. â Protect all electrostatic-sensiti ve parts and assemblies with conducti ve or appro v ed containers or packaging. â K eep electrostatic-sensiti v e parts in their containers until the parts arri ve at static-free w orkstations. â Place items on a grounded surface before remo ving items from their containers. â Alw ays be properly grounded when touching a sensiti ve component or assembly . â Store reusable electrostatic-sensiti ve parts from assemblies in protecti ve packaging or nonconducti ve foam. â Use transporters and con ve yors made of antistatic belts and roller b ushings. Ensure that mechanized equipment used for moving materials is wired to ground and that proper materials are selected to a v oid static charging. When grounding is not possible, use an ionizer to dissipate electric charges.
4â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminari es 4.6 W orkstation Precau tions Use the follo wing grounding precautions at workstations: â Cov er the workstation with appro v ed static-shielding material (refer to T able 4-2, âStatic-Shielding Materialsâ ). â Use a wrist strap connected to a properly grounded work surface and use properly grounded tools and equipment. â Use conducti v e field service tools such as cutters, scre wdri vers, and v acuums. â When f ixtures must directly contact dissipati ve surf aces, use f ixtures made only of static-safe materials. â K eep the work area free of nonconducti ve materials such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and Styrofoam. â Handle electrostatic-sensiti ve components, parts, and assemblies by the case or PCM laminate. Handle these items only at static-free workstations. â A v oid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry . â T urn off po wer and input signals before inserting or removing connectors or test equipment.
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr eliminaries Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 4â7 4.7 Groundin g E quip ment an d Methods Grounding equipment must include either a wrist strap or a foot strap at a grounded workstation. â When seated, wear a wrist strap connected to a grounded system. Wrist straps are flexible straps with a minimum of one megohm ±10% resistance in the ground cords. T o provide proper ground, wear a strap snugly against the skin at all times. On grounded mats with banana-plug connectors, use alligator clips to connect a wrist strap. â When standing, use foot straps and a grounded floor mat. Foot straps (heel, toe, or boot straps) can be used at standing workstations and are compatible with most types of shoes or boots. On conducti ve floors or dissipati ve floor mats, use foot straps on both feet with a minimum of one megohm resistance between the operator and ground. T o be effecti ve, the conducti ve strips must be w orn in contact with the skin. Other grounding equipment recommended for use in pre v enting electrostatic damage includes: â Antistatic tape â Antistatic smocks, aprons, and slee ve protectors â Conducti ve bins and other assembly or soldering aids â Nonconducti ve foam â Conducti ve tabletop w orkstations with ground cords of one megohm resistance â Static-dissipati ve tables or floor mats with hard ties to the ground â Field service kits â Static aw areness labels â Material-handling packages â Nonconducti ve plastic bags, tubes, or box es â Metal tote boxes â Electrostatic v oltage le vels and protecti ve materials
4â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminari es T able 4-1 shows ho w humidity affects the electrostatic v oltage le ve ls generated by dif ferent activities. T able 4-2 lists the shielding protection provided by antistatic bags and floor mats. Ta b l e 4 - 1 T ypical Electrostatic V olta ge Levels Relative Humidity Event 10% 40% 55% W alking across car pet 35,000 V 15,000 V 7,500 V W a lking across vin yl floor 12,000 V 5,000 V 3,000 V Motions of bench worker 6,000 V 800 V 400 V Removing DIPS from plastic tube 2,000 V 700 V 400 V Removing DIPS from vin yl tra y 11,500 V 4,000 V 2,000 V Removing DIPS from Styrof oam 14,500 V 5,000 V 3,500 V Removing b ubb le pac k from PCB 26,500 V 20,000 V 7 ,000 V P a c king PCBs in f oam-lined bo x 21,000 V 11,000 V 5,000 V â A product can be degraded by as little as 700 V. Ta b l e 4 - 2 Static-Shielding Materials Material Use V oltage Pr otection Level Antistatic plastic Bags 1,500 V Carbon-loaded plastic F loor mats 7,500 V Metallized laminate Floor mats 5,000 V
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â1 5 Remo v a l and Repl a cemen t Pr ocedure s This chapter provides remo v a l and replacement procedures. There are as many as 109 scre ws , in 10 different sizes, that may ha ve to be remo v ed, replaced, or loosened when servicing the computer . Make special note of each scre w size and location during remov al and replacement. Refer to Appendix C, âScre w Listing, â for detailed information on scre w and nut sizes, locations, and usage.
5â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5 . 1 Seri al N umber Report the computer serial number to HP when requesting information or ordering spare parts. The serial number is located on the bottom of the computer . Ser ial Numb er L ocation
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â3 5 .2 Disassem bl y Seque nce Chart Use the chart belo w to determine the section number to be referenced when removing computer components. Disassembl y Sequence Chart Section Description # of Screws Remo ved 5.3 Preparing the Computer for Disassemb ly Batter y pack 0 5.4 Hard Drive 3 loosened to remov e the hard drive co ver 4 to remov e the hard dr ives 8 to remov e the hard dr ive frames 5.5 Computer F eet 0 5.6 Memor y Module 2 loosened to remov e the memor y module/Mini Card module compar tment cov er 5.7 Mini Card Module 0 Ã T o pre v ent an unresponsiv e system and the displa y of a warning message, install only a Mini Card de vice authorized f or use in your computer b y the gov er nmental agency that regulates wireless de vices in yo ur countr y . If you install a de vice and then receive a w arning message, remov e the de vice to restore computer functionality . Then contact Customer Care. 5.8 RT C B a t t e r y 0 5.9 Optical Drive 1 to remov e the optical dr ive 2 to remov e the optical dr ive brac k et 5.10 Switch Cov er 5 5.11 K eyboard Assemb ly 2
5â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5 .3 Preparing t h e Com pu ter f or Di sassem bl y Before you begin an y remo v al or installation procedures: 1. Shut do wn the computer . If you are unsure whether the computer is of f or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it do wn through the operating system. 2. Disconnect all external de vices connected to the computer . 3. Disconnect the po wer cord. 5.12 LED Board 4 5.13 Key b o a r d 5 5.14 Displa y Assemb ly 6 to remo ve the displa y assembly 6 to remov e the display bez el 4 to remov e the display panel 4 to remov e each display hinge 1 to remov e the display inv e r ter 5.15 To p C o v e r 24 5.16 System Board 8 5.17 Bluetooth Module 2 5.18 Modem Cab le 0 5.19 USB Board 0 5.20 Speaker Assemb ly 2 5.21 F an/Heat Sink Assembly 9 5.22 Processor 1 loosened 5.23 PC Card Assembly 2 Disassembl y Sequence Char t (Continued)
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â5 4. Remov e the battery pack b y follo wing these steps: a. T urn the computer upside do wn with the front to ward you. b . Slide the battery pack release latch 1 to the left. (The battery pack disengages from the computer .) c. Lift the front edge of the battery pack 3 up and swing it back to remov e it. R emo v ing the Battery P ack Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the battery pack. Battery P ack Spare P ar t Number Information 8-cell, 4.4-hour batter y pack 403808-001
5â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5 .4 H ard Dri v e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3 ). 2. Loosen the three black Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre ws 1 that secure the hard dri ve co v er to the computer . 3. Lift the rear edge of the hard dri v e cov er 2 and swing it up and forward and remo ve it. â The hard dri ve co v er is included in the Miscellaneous Plastics Kit, spare part number 415692-001. R emo v ing the Har d Dr i v e Co ver Har d Drive Spare P art Number Information Hard drives (include fr ame and connector) 7200 r pm, 100-GB 410197-001 5400 r pm, 120-GB 5400 r pm, 100-GB 5400 r pm, 80-GB 410198-001 407770-001 407847-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â7 4. Remov e the two silv er Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 hard dri ve retention scre ws 1 that secure the hard dri ves to the computer . 5. Slide the hard dri v e 2 aw ay from the hard dri ve connector . 6. Remov e the hard dri ve from the hard dri v e bay 3 . R emo v ing the Har d Dr i v e
5â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 7. Remov e the four Phillips PM3.0Ã4.0 hard dri v e frame scre ws 1 that secure the hard dri v e frame to the hard dri v e. 8. Lift the hard dri ve straight up 2 to remo v e if from the hard dri v e frame. R emo v ing the Har d Dr i v e F r ame Re v erse the abov e procedure to reassemble and install the hard dri ve.
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â9 5. 5 C o m p u t e r Fe e t The computer feet are adhesi v e-backed rubber pads. The feet are included in the Miscellaneous Plastics Kit, spare part number 415692-001. Re p la ci n g th e C om p ut e r Fee t
5â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5. 6 M e m o r y M o d u l e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the rear panel to ward you. Memory Module Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation Memor y modules (1 DIMM) PC2-5300 1024 MB 512 MB 409060-001 409059-001 PC2-4200 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 407767-001 407766-001 403573-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â11 3. Loosen the two black Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre ws 1 that secure the memory module/Mini Card module compartment cov er to the computer . 4. Lift the right side of the cov er 2 and swing it up and to the left and remov e it. â The memory module/Mini Card module compartment cov er is included in the Miscellaneous Plastics Kit, spare part number 415692-001. R emo v ing the Memory Module/Mini Car d Module Com partment Cover
5â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5. Spread the retaining tabs 1 on each side of the memory module socket to release the memory module. (The edge of the module opposite the socket rises a way from the computer .) 6. Slide the module aw ay from the socket at an angle 2 . 7. Remov e the memory module board. â Memory modules are designed with notches 3 to pre vent incorrect installation into the memory module socket. R emo v ing the Memory Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a memory module.
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â13 5 .7 M ini C ard Module Mini Car d Module Spare P art Number Information 802.11a/b/g WLAN module f or use in the MO W 1 categor y countries listed below: 407576-001 Antigua and Barbuda Argentina Au s t ra l i a Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Repub lic Guam Guatemala Hong K ong Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico Ne w Zealand Pa r a g u a y Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam 802.11a/b/g WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countries are categor ized as MO W 2. 407576-002 Aruba Au s t r i a Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or t ugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan
5â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the memory module/Mini Card module compartment cov er ( Section 5.6 ). 802.11a/b/g WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countries are categor ized as the rest of the w orld (RO W). 407576-003 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K o rea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11b/g WLAN module f or use in the f ollowing countries: 409250-004 Jordan Israel Ku w a i t Thailand United Arab Emirates Ukraine Mini Car d Module Spare P art Number Information (Continued)
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â15 3. Before disconnecting the antenna cables, make note of which cable is attached to which antenna clip on the Mini Card module, and then disconnect the auxiliary and main 1 antenna cables from the Mini Card module. 4. Slide the Mini Card retainer bar 2 aw ay from the Mini Card module. (The edge of the module opposite the socket rises aw ay from the computer .) 5. Remov e the Mini Card module b y pulling the card a way from the socket at an angle 3 . â The Mini Card module is designed with a notch 4 to pre vent incorrect installation. R emo v ing a Mini C ar d module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a Mini Card module.
5â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5. 8 R TC B a t t e r y 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the memory module/Mini Card module compartment cov er ( Section 5.6 ). 3. Remov e the Mini Card module ( Section 5.7 ). 4. Remov e the R TC battery from the socket on the system board. R emo v ing the R T C Bat tery Re v erse the abov e procedure to install an R TC battery . R TC Battery Spare Part Number Information R TC batter y 403819-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â17 5 .9 O ptical Driv e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the left side to ward you. Optical Drive Spare P art Number Information D VD±RW and CD-R W Double La y er Combo Drive with LightScribe D VD±RW and CD-R W Double La y er Combo Drive D VD/CD-RW Combo Driv e 403807-001 403806-001 403805-001
5â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 3. Remov e the Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 scre w 1 that secures the optical dri ve to the computer . 4. Insert a thin tool, such as an unbent paper clip 2 , into the media tray release hole and release the media tray . 5. Use the media tray to slide the optical dri v e 3 out of the computer . 6. Remov e the optical dri ve. R emo v ing the Optical Dr iv e
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â19 7. If it is necessary to replace the optical dri ve brack et, remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre ws 1 that secure the bracket to the optical dri v e. 8. Remov e the optical dri ve bracket 1 . R emo v ing the Optical Dr iv e Br ac k et Re v erse the abov e procedure to install an optical dri v e.
5â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5. 1 0 Sw i t c h C ove r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 scre ws 1 and the three Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 scre ws 2 that secure the switch cov er to the computer . R emo v ing the S wit c h Co ver Sc r ew s Switch Co ver Spare P ar t Number Information Switch cov er (includes LED board and LED board cab le) 403817-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â21 3. T urn the computer display-side up with the front to ward you. 4. Open the computer as far as possible. 5. Insert a flat-bladed scre wdri v er under the display hinge cove r 1 sections of the switch cov er . 6. Lift the switch cov er until the left and right sides 2 of the switch cov er disengage from the computer . 7. Remov e the switch co ve r . R emo v ing the S wit ch C o v er Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the switch cov er .
5â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5. 1 1 K eyb o a r d A s s e m b l y 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the memory module/Mini Card module compartment cov er ( Section 5.6 ). 3. Remov e the switch co ve r ( Section 5.10 ). 4. T urn the computer upside do wn with the rear panel to ward you. 5. Remov e the Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 scre w 1 in the memory module/Mini Card module compartment that secures the ke yboard assembly to the computer . 6. Remov e the silv er Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre w 2 in the battery bay that secures the ke yboard assembly to the computer . R emo v ing the K e yboar d Assembl y Sc r e w s Ke yboar d Assemb ly Spare P ar t Number Information K eyboard assembly fr ame 403818-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â2 3 7. T urn the computer display-side up with front to ward you. 8. Open the computer as far as possible. 9. Lift and hold the rear edge of the ke yboard until the LED board cable connector is accessible. R eleasing the K ey boar d Ass embl y
5â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 10. Release the zero insertion force (ZIF) connector 1 to which the LED board cable is connected and disconnect the cable 2 . R eleasing the K ey boar d Ass embl y
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â2 5 11. Swing the ke yboard assembly 1 forward until the assembly rests on the palm rest. 12. Release the ZIF connector to which the ke yboard cable 2 is attached and disconnect the ke yboard cable 3 . 13. Remov e the ke yboard assembly . R emo v ing the K e yboar d Assembl y Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the ke yboard assembly .
5â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5 . 1 2 LED B oard 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and then remov e the follo wing components: a. Memory module/Mini Card module compartment cov er ( Section 5.6) b . Switch co ver ( Section 5.10 ) c. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) 2. T urn the ke yboard assembly upside do wn with the LED board to ward you. LED Boar d Spare P art Number Information LED board (includes LED board cable 408494-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â2 7 3. Remov e the four Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 scre ws 1 that secure the LED board to the ke yboard frame. 4. Remov e the LED board 2 . R emo v ing the LED Boar d Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the LED board.
5â2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5. 1 3 K eyb o a r d 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and then remov e the follo wing components: a. Memory module/Mini Card module compartment cov er ( Section 5.6) b . Switch co ver ( Section 5.10 ) c. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) 2. T urn the ke yboard assembly upside do wn with the LED board to ward you. Ke yboar d Spare P ar t Number Information Belgium Europe F rance F rench Canada Ger many Greece Israel Italy Ko r e a Latin America 403809-A41 403809-021 403809-051 403809-121 403809-041 403809-151 403809-BB1 403809-061 403809-AD1 403809-161 The Netherlands Norwa y P or t ugal Saudi Arabia Spain Sweden and Finland Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 403809-331 403809-091 403809-131 403809-171 403809-071 403809-B71 403809-111 403809-141 403809-031 403809-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5 â2 9 3. Remov e the f i v e Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 scre ws 1 that secure the ke yboard to the ke yboard frame. 4. Remov e the ke yboard 2 . R emo v ing the K ey board Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the ke yboard.
5â30 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5 . 1 4 Di spla y Assemb l y 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the memory module/Mini Card module compartment cov er ( Section 5.6 ). 3. Disconnect the wireless ante nna cables from the Mini Card module ( Section 5.7 ). Displa y Assembl y Spare P a rt Number Information Displa y assemb lies (include displa y cable , wireless antenna boards , and antenna cab les) 17-inch, WXGA Dual Lamp 17-inch, WSXGA with BrightView 17-inch, WXGA with BrightView 408486-001 403797-001 403796-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â31 4. Remov e the switch co ve r ( Section 5.10 ). 5. Remov e the ke yboard assembly ( Section 5.11 ). 6. Disconnect the display cable 1 from the system board. 7. Remov e the wireless antenna cables from the clips 2 in the top cov er . Disconnecting the Dis pla y and Wir eless Ant enna Cable s
5â3 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s à CA UTION: Support the display a ssembl y w hen r emo v ing the fo llo w ing sc r e ws . F ailure to su pport the display as sembl y can r esult in damage to the displa y asse mbly and other com puter components . 8. Remov e the the silv er Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre w 1 and the f i ve Phillips PM2.5Ã9.0 scre ws 2 that secure the display assembly to the computer . 9. Lift the display assembly straight up and remov e it 3 . R emo v ing the Displa y Assembl y
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â3 3 Displa y Assembl y Subcomponent Spare P art Number Information Description Spare P art Number Display Plastics Kit F or use with Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies F or use with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies Includes: â Displa y bezel â Displa y enclosure â Displa y release latch actuator and hooks (not illustrated) 412269-001 403881-001 Display Hinge Kit F or use with Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies F or use with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies 412270-001 403884-001 Display in ver ter boar ds: F or use with Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies F or use with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies 412268-001 403831-001 Display P anel Kit (includes display panel cab le) F or use with Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies F or use with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies 412271-001 403885-001 Wireless Antenna Kit (includes cable and tr ansceiv ers) 403882-001 Display Label Kit (not illustr ated) 403887-001 Display Scre w Kit (not illustrated), includes: â Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 screws â Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 scre ws â Rubber scre w cov ers 403886-001
5â34 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 10. Remov e the six rubber scre w cove rs 1 and 2 and the six Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 scre ws 3 that secure the display bezel to the display assembly . â The four rubber scre w co vers 1 on the top edge of the display bezel are larger than the tw o rubber scre w co vers 2 on the bottom edge of the bezel. R emo v ing the Displa y Bez el Scr ew s
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5 â3 5 11. Flex the inside edges of the left and right sides 1 and the top and bottom sides 2 of the display bezel until the bezel disengages from the display assembly . 12. Remov e the display bezel 3 . R emo v ing the Displa y Bez el
5â3 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 13. Disconnect the follo wing cables: 1 Display panel cable 2 Light sensor cable 3 Display in verter cable Disconnecting the Dis pla y P anel Cables 14. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 scre ws 1 and the two Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 scre ws 2 that secure the display panel to the display enclosure. 15. Remov e the display panel 3 . R emo v ing the Displa y P anel
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â3 7 16. Remov e the four Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre ws 1 that secure each display hinge to the display panel. 17. Remov e the display hinges 2 . R emo v ing the Displa y Hinges
5â3 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 18. Remov e the Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre w 1 that secures the display in verter to the display enclosure. 19. Swing the top edge of the in verter 2 up and forward and remov e the in verter . R emo v ing the Displa y In ve rter
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â3 9 20. Release the retention tabs 1 b uilt in to the display enclosure lining that secure the wireless antenna cables to the display enclosure. 21. Detach the wireless antenna transcei v ers 2 from the display enclosure. 22. Remov e the wireless antenna transcei vers and cables 3 . R emo v ing the W ir eles s Antenna T r ansce i v ers and C ables Re v erse the abov e procedure to reassemble and install the display assembly .
5â40 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5. 1 5 T o p C ove r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and then remov e the follo wing components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory module/Mini Card module compartment co ver ( Section 5.6) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. Switch cov er ( Section 5.10 ) e. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.14 ) To p C o v e r Spare P art Number Information T op cov er (includes T ouchP ad) 403822-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â41 2. Release the ZIF connector to which the T ouchPad cable 1 is connected and disconnect the T ouchPad cable 2 from the system board. â The T ouchPad cable is included in the Miscellaneous Cable Kit, spare part number 403814-001. Disconnecting the T ouc hP ad Cable
5â4 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 3. T urn the computer upside do wn with the front to ward you. 4. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 scre ws 1 and three silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre ws 2 that secure the top cov er to the computer . R emo v ing the T op Co v er Sc r ew s, P art 1
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â43 5. Remov e the f i v e Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 scre ws that secure the top cov er to the computer . R emo v ing the T op Co v er Sc r ew s, P art 2
5â44 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 6. T urn the computer right-side up with the front to ward you. 7. Remov e the eight silv er Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre ws that secure the top cov er to the computer . R emo v ing the T op Co v er Sc r ew s, P art 3
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â4 5 8. Remov e the six Phillips PM2.5Ã 13.0 scre ws that secure the top cov er to the computer . R emo v ing the T op Co v er Sc r ew s, P art 4
5â46 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 9. Lift up the rear edge of the top cov er 1 until it disengages from the base enclosure. 10. Lift the top cov er 2 straight up and remo ve it. R emo v ing the T op Co v er Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the top cov er .
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â4 7 5. 1 6 Sys t e m B o a r d â When replacing the system board, ensure that the follo wing components are remov ed from the defecti ve system board and installed on the replacement system board: â Memory modules ( Section 5.6 ) â Mini Card module ( Section 5.7 ) â R TC battery ( Section 5.8) â Speaker assembly ( Section 5.20 ) â Fan/heat sink assembly ( Section 5.21 ) â Processor ( Section 5.22 ) â PC Card assembly ( Section 5.23 ) 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory module/Mini Card module compartment co ver ( Section 5.6) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. Switch cov er ( Section 5.10 ) e. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.14 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.15 ) System Boar d Spare P art Number Information System board 407758-001
5â4 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 2. Press in on the ExpressCard slot bezel 1 to release it. 3. Remov e the ExpressCard slot bezel 2 . R emo v ing the Expr essC ar d Slot Bez el
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â4 9 4. Remov e the two silv er Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre ws 1 that secure the display hinge support bracket to the computer . 5. Remov e the display hinge support brack et 2 . â The display hinge support bracket is included in the Miscellaneous Bracket Kit, spare part number 403816-001. R emo v ing the Displa y Hinge Support Br ac k et
5â5 0 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 6. Remov e the follo wing screws: 1 One Phillips PM2.5Ã9.0 scre w that secures the system board to the base enclosure 2 Four silv er Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 screws that secure the system board to the base enclosure 3 One silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre w that secures the optical dri ve connector board to the base enclosure 7. Remov e the ExpressCard assembly 4 . R emo v ing the S ys tem Boar d Sc r e ws
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â51 8. Disconnect the follo wing cables from the system board: 1 modem cable 2 Bluetooth board cable 3 USB board cable Disconnec ting the USB Boar d and Modem Cables
5â5 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 9. Lift the right side of the system board 1 until the right side of the board is clear of the base enclosure. 10. Slide the system board 2 to the right at an angle and re move it 3 . R emo v ing the S yst em Boar d
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â5 3 11. Remov e the optical dri ve connector board from the system board. â The optical dri ve connector board is a vailable using spare part number 408491-001. R emo v ing the Optical Dr iv e C onnector Boar d Re v erse the abov e procedures to install the system board.
5â54 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5 . 1 7 Bluetooth Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory module/Mini Card module compartment co ver ( Section 5.6) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. Switch cov er ( Section 5.10 ) e. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.14 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.15 ) Bluetooth Module Spare P art Number Information Bluetooth module (includes Bl uetooth module cab le) 397922-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â5 5 2. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre ws 1 that secure the Bluetooth module to the base enclosure 3. Remov e the Bluetooth module from the base enclosure 2 . 4. Disconnect the Bluetooth module cable 3 from the Bluetooth module. R emo v ing the Bluetooth Module
5â5 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5. Slide and hold the battery release latch acuator 1 to the right. 6. Slide the Bluetooth module cable 2 through the hole in the battery release latch actuator . 7. Remov e the Bluetooth module cable from the base enclosure clips 3 that hold it. 8. Remov e the Bluetooth module cable 4 . â The Bluetooth module cable is included with the Bluetooth module and is also a v ailable in the Miscellaneous Cable Kit, spare part number 403814-001. R emo v ing the Bluetooth Module Ca ble Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the Bluetooth module.
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â5 7 5 . 1 8 Mode m Cable â The modem board cable is included in the Miscellaneous Cable Kit, spare part number 403814-001. 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory module/Mini Card module compartment co ver ( Section 5.6) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. Switch cov er ( Section 5.10 ) e. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.14 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.15 )
5â5 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 2. Remov e the modem connector 1 from the clip 2 in the base enclosure. 3. Remov e the modem cable from the routing channel 3 in the base enclosure. R emo v ing the Modem Ca ble Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the modem cable.
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â5 9 5. 1 9 U S B B o a r d 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory module/Mini Card module compartment co ver ( Section 5.6) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. Switch cov er ( Section 5.10 ) e. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.14 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.15 ) h. System board ( Section 5.16 ) USB Boar d Spare P art Number Information USB board (includes USB board and USB board cabl e) 408491-001
5â60 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 2. Remov e the USB board cable from the routing clips 1 in the base enclosure. 3. Remov e the USB board 2 from the base enclosure. 4. Disconnect the USB board cable 3 from the USB board. â The USB board cable is included with the USB board and is also a v ailable in the Miscella neous Cable Kit, spare part number 403814-001. R emo v ing the U SB Board Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a USB board.
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â61 5 .20 Spea k er Asse mbl y 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory module/Mini Card module compartment co ver ( Section 5.6) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. Switch cov er ( Section 5.10 ) e. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.14 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.15 ) h. System board ( Section 5.16 ) Speaker Assembl y Spare P a rt Number Information Speak er assembly 403825-001
5â6 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 2. T urn the system board upside do wn with the front to ward you. 3. Disconnect the speaker cable from the system board. Disconnecting the S peak er Cable
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â6 3 4. Remov e the two silv er Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre ws 1 that secure the speaker assembly to the system board. 5. Slide the speaker assembly 2 forward until it clears the system board. R emo v ing the Speak er Assembl y Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the speaker assembly .
5â64 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5 .2 1 F an/Hea t Sink Assembly 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory module/Mini Card module compartment co ver ( Section 5.6) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. Switch cov er ( Section 5.10 ) e. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.14 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.15 ) h. System board ( Section 5.16 ) F an/Heat Sink Assembl y Spar e P ar t Number Information F an/heat sink assembly (includes thermal paste) 407862-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5 â6 5 2. Disconnect the fan cable 1 and the po wer connector cable 2 from the system board. 3. Remov e the four silv er Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre ws 3 that secure the fan/heat sink assembly to the system board. R emo v ing the F an/H eat Sink Asse mbly S cr ew s , P ar t 1
5â6 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 4. Remov e the follo wing screws: 3 One Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 scre w that secures the expansion port 2 bracket and f an/heat sink assembly to the system board 4 T wo slotted M1.5Ã9.0 scre ws on each side of the expansion port 2 that secure the e xpansion port brack et and fan/heat sink assembly to the system board 5 T wo Phillips PM3.0Ã7.0 scre ws on each side of the external monitor port that secure the f an/heat sink assembly to the system board R emo v ing the F an/H eat Sink Asse mbly S cr ew s , P ar t 2
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â6 7 5. Slide the expansion port 2 brack et 1 aw ay from the system board. 6. Remov e the f an/heat sink assembly 2 . â Due to the adhesi v e quality of the thermal paste located between the fan/heat sink assembly and processor , it may be necessary to mov e the fan/heat sink assembly from side to side to detach the it from the processor . R emo v ing the F an/H eat Sink Asse mbly
5â6 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s â The thermal paste should be thoroughly cleaned from the surfaces of the processor 1 and fan/heat sink assembly 2 each time the fan/heat sink assembly is removed. Thermal paste should be reapplied to both surfaces before the fan/heat sink assembly is reinstalled. Thermal paste is included with all fan/heat sink assembly and processor spare part kits. R eplac ing the T hermal P aste
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â6 9 â If necessary , perform the follo wing steps to remov e the po wer connector cable from the fan/heat sink assembly . The po wer connector cable is included in the Miscellaneous Cable Kit, spare part number 403814-001. 7. T urn the fan/heat sink assembly upside do wn with the po wer connector to ward you. 8. Remov e the po wer connector cable 1 from the routing channel on the fan/heat sink assembly . 9. Remov e the po wer connector 2 from the clip in the fan/heat sink assembly . R emo v ing the P o w er C onnector C able Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the fan/heat sink assembly .
5â7 0 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5. 22 P r o c e s s o r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory module/Mini Card module compartment co ver ( Section 5.6) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. Switch cov er ( Section 5.10 ) e. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.14 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.15 ) h. System board ( Section 5.16 ) i. F an/heat sink assembly ( Section 5.21 ) Pr ocessor Spare P art Number Information Pr ocessors (include thermal paste) Intel P entium M 21.7-GHZ Intel P entium M 2.0-GHz Intel P entium M 1.83-GHz Intel P entium M 66-GHz Dual Code 407763-001 407662-001 407661-001 407660-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â71 2. Use a flat-bladed scre wdri v er to turn the slotted locking scre w 1 one-half turn counterclockwise. 3. Lift the processor straight up and remov e it 2 . â The gold triangle 3 on the processor should be aligned with the triangle 4 embossed on the processor socket when you install the processor. R emo v ing the Pr ocess or Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the processor .
5â7 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5. 23 P C C a r d A s s e m b l y 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory module/Mini Card module compartment co ver ( Section 5.6) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. Switch cov er ( Section 5.10 ) e. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.14 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.15 ) h. System board ( Section 5.16 ) PC Car d Assembl y Spare P art Number Information PC Card assembly 403835-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â7 3 2. T urn the system board upside do wn with the audio jacks, USB ports, and external monitor port to ward you. 3. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre ws that secure the PC Card assembly to the system board. R emo v ing the P C Car d Assembl y Sc r ew s
5â7 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 4. T urn the system board top-side up with the audio jacks, USB ports, and external monitor port to ward you. 5. Disengage the hooks 1 on the PC Card assembly from the detents 2 on the PC Card connector and remo v e the PC Card assembly 3 from the system board. R emo v ing the P C Car d Assembl y Re v erse the abov e procedures to install the PC Card assembly .
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â1 6 Spec ific ations This chapter provides physical and performance specif ications. Ta b l e 6 - 1 Computer Dimensions Metric U .S. Height F ront Rear Width Depth 3.76 cm 4.62 cm 39.68 cm 28.19 cm 1.48 in 1.82 in 15.62 in 11.10 in W eight With 17.0-inch displa y , optical drive and 8-cell batter y pac k 3.62 kg 7.98 lbs Input P ower Operating v oltage Operating current 18.5 V dc to 19.0 V dc 4.74 A or 4.9 A T emperature Operating Nonoperating 10°C to 35°C -20°C to 60°C 50°F to 95°F -4°F to 140°F
6â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90% 5% to 95% 10% to 90% 5% to 95% Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia) Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia) -15 m to 3,048 m -15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft -50 ft to 40,000 ft Shock Operating Nonoperating 125 g, 2 ms, half-sine 200 g, 2 ms, half-sine Random Vibration Operating Nonoperating 0.75 g zero-to-peak, 10 Hz to 500 Hz, 0.25 oct/min s weep r ate 1.50 g zero-to-peak, 10 Hz to 500 Hz, 0.5 oct/min s weep r ate â Applicable product safety standards specify thermal limits for plastic surfaces. The computer operates well within this range of temperatures. Ta b l e 6 - 1 Computer (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â3 Ta b l e 6 - 2 17.0-inch, WSXGA , BrightVie w Displa y Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 23.00 cm 36.80 cm 43.40 cm 9.06 in 14.49 in 17.09 in Number of colors Up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 200:1 Brightness 180 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.197 à 0.197 mm 1680 à 1050 RGB v er tical str ipe Backlight Edge lit Character display 80 à 25 T otal power consumption 4 W Viewing angle /-65° horizontal, 5 0° v er tical typical
6â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 3 17.0-inch, WXGA , BrightVie w Displa y Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 23.00 cm 36.80 cm 43.40 cm 9.06 in 14.49 in 17.09 in Number of colors Up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 200:1 Brightness 180 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.259 à 0.259 mm 1280 à 800 RGB v er tical str ipe Backlight Edge lit Character display 80 à 25 T otal power consumption 4 W Viewing angle /-40° horizontal, 20/-40° v er tical typical
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â5 Ta b l e 6 - 4 Har d Drives 100-GB* 80-GB* 80-GB* Dimensions Height Width We i g h t 9.5 mm 70 mm 102 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g Interface type ATA - 5 ATA - 5 ATA - 5 T ransfer rate Synchronous (maximum) Security 100 MB/sec A T A security 100 MB/sec ATA s e c u r i t y 100 MB/sec A T A security Seek times (typical read, including setting) Single trac k Ave r a g e Maximum 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms Logical bloc ks â 195,364,233 156,301,488 156,301,488 Disc rotational speed 4200 r pm 5400 r pm 4200 r pm Operating temperature 5°C to 55°C (41°F to 131°F) â Certain restrictions and exclusio ns apply. Consult Customer Care for details. *1 GB = 1 billion b ytes when ref erring to hard dr iv e storage capacity . Actual accessible capacity is less . â Actual drive specificatio ns ma y differ slightly .
6â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s 60-GB* 60-GB* 40-GB* Dimensions Height Width We i g h t 9.5 mm 70 mm 102 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g Interface type ATA - 5 ATA - 5 ATA - 5 T ransfer rate Synchronous (maximum) Security 100 MB/sec A T A security 100 MB/sec ATA s e c u r i t y 100 MB/sec A T A security Seek times (typical read, including setting) Single trac k Ave r a g e Maximum 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms Logical bloc ks â 117,210,240 117,210,240 78,140,160 Disc rotational speed 5400 r pm 4200 r pm 4200 r pm Operating temperature 5°C to 55°C (41°F to 131°F) â Certain restrictions and exclusio ns apply. Consult Customer Care for details. *1 GB = 1 billion b ytes when ref erring to hard dr iv e storage capacity . Actual accessible capacity is less . â Actual drive specificatio ns ma y differ slightly . Ta b l e 6 - 4 Har d Drives (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â7 Ta b l e 6 - 5 Primary 8-cell, Li-Ion Batter y P ack Dimensions Height Width Depth We i g h t 2.00 cm 9.40 cm 13.40 cm 0.34 kg 0.79 in 3.70 in 5.28 in 0.75 lb Energ y V oltage Amp-hour capacity W a tt-hour capacity 11.1 V 4.4 Ah 48 Wh T emperature Operating Nonoperating 5°C to 45°C 0°C to 60°C 41°F to 113°F 32°F to 140°F
6â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 6 D VD/CD-R W Combo Drive Applicable disc Read: D VD-R, D VD-R W , D VD-ROM (D VD-5, D VD-9, D VD-10, D VD-18), CD-ROM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio , CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2), CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2), CD-R, CD-R W , Photo CD (single and multisession), and CD-Bridge Write: CD-R and CD-R W Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in) Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD media D VD media Random Full strok e < 110 ms < 210 ms < 130 ms < 225 ms A udio output level Line-out, 0.7 V r ms Cache b uffer 2 MB Data transfer rate CD-R (24X) CD-R W (10X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 3600 KB/s (150 KB/ s at 1X CD rate) 1500 KB/s (150 KB/ s at 1X CD rate) 3600 KB/s (150 KB/ s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â9 Ta b l e 6 - 7 DV D ± RW and CD-R W Double La yer Combo Drive Applicable disc Read: D VD-R, D VD-RW , D VD-RO M (D VD-5, D VD-9, D VD-10, D VD-18), CD-ROM (Mode 1 and 2), CD Digital A udio , CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2), CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2), CD-R, CD-R W , Photo CD (single and multisession), CD-Bridge Write: CD-R and CD-R W D VD-R and DV D - R W Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in) Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD D VD Random Full strok e < 175 ms < 285 ms < 230 ms < 335 ms A udio output level A udio-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 2 MB
6â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Data transfer rate CD-R (16X) CD-R W (8X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) D VD-R (4X) DV D - R W ( 2 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 2,400 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1,200 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 5,400 KB/s (1,352 KB /s at 1X D VD rate) 2,700 KB/s (1,352 KB /s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds Ta b l e 6 - 7 DV D ± RW and CD-R W Double La y er Combo Drive (Continued) Ta b l e 6 - 8 DV D ± RW and CD-R W Double La yer Combo Drive with LightScribe Applicable disc Read: D VD-R, D VD-RW , D VD-RO M (D VD-5, D VD-9, D VD-10, D VD-18), CD-ROM (Mode 1 and 2), CD Digital A udio , CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2), CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2), CD-R, CD-R W , Photo CD (single and multisession), CD-Bridge Write: CD-R and CD-R W D VD-R and DV D - R W Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â11 Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD D VD Random Full strok e < 175 ms < 285 ms < 230 ms < 335 ms A udio output level A udio-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 2 MB Data transfer rate CD-R (16X) CD-R W (8X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) D VD-R (4X) DV D - R W ( 2 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 2,400 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1,200 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 5,400 KB/s (1,352 KB /s at 1X D VD rate) 2,700 KB/s (1,352 KB /s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds Ta b l e 6 - 8 DV D ± RW and CD-R W Double La yer Combo Drive with LightScribe (Continued)
6â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 9 System DMA Hard ware DMA S ystem Function DMA0 Not applicable DMA1* Not applicable DMA2* Not applicable DMA3 Not applicable DMA4 Direct memor y access controller DMA5* A v ailable f or PC Card DMA6 Not assigned DMA7 Not assigned *PC Card controller ca n use DMA 1, 2, or 5.
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â13 T able 6-10 System Interrupts Hard ware IRQ System Function IRQ0 System timer IRQ1 Standard 101-/102-K ey or Microsoft Natural K eyboard IRQ2 Cascaded IRQ3 USB2 Enhanced Ho st Controllerâ24CD IRQ4 COM1 IRQ5* Cone xant A CâLink A udio Data F ax Modem with Smar tCP IRQ6 Diskette driv e IRQ7* P arallel por t IRQ8 System CMOS/real-time clock IRQ9* Microsoft A CPI-compliant system IRQ10* Realtek R TL8139 F amily PCI f ast Ether net Controller
6â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s IRQ11 TI OHCI 1394 host controller TI PCI1410 CardBus controller IRQ12 Synaptics PS/2 T ouchP ad IRQ13 Numer ic data processor IRQ14 Pri mar y IDE channel IRQ15 Secondar y IDE channel *Def ault configuration; audio possib le configurations are IRQ5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, or none. â PC Cards may assert IRQ3, IRQ4, IR Q5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, IRQ11, or IRQ15. Either the infrared or the se rial port may assert IRQ3 or IRQ4. T able 6-10 System Interrupts (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â15 T able 6-11 System I/O Addresses I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 000 - 00F DMA controller no . 1 010 - 01F Unused 020 - 021 Interrupt controller no . 1 022 - 024 Opti chipset configuration registers 025 - 03F Unused 02E - 02F 87334 âSuper I/Oâ configuration f or CPU 040 - 05F Counter/timer registers 044 - 05F Unused 060 K eyboard controller 061 P or t B 062 - 063 Unused 064 K eyboard controller 065 - 06F Unused 070 - 071 NMI enab le/R TC 072 - 07F Unused 080 - 08F DMA page registers 090 - 091 Unused 092 P or t A 093 - 09F Unused 0A0 - 0A1 Interrupt controller no . 2
6â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 0A2 - 0BF Unused 0C0 - 0DF DMA controller no . 2 0E0 - 0EF Unused 0F0 - 0F1 Coprocessor busy clear/reset 0F2 - 0FF Unused 100 - 16F Unused 170 - 177 Secondar y fix ed disk controller 178 - 1EF Unused 1F0 - 1F7 Pr imar y fix ed disk controller 1F8 - 200 Unused 201 Jo ystic k (decoded in ESS1688) 202 - 21F Unused 220 - 22F Enter tainment audio 230 - 26D Unused 26E - 26 Unused 278 - 27F Unused 280 - 2AB Unused 2A0 - 2A7 Unused 2A8 - 2E7 Unused 2E8 - 2EF Reser v ed serial por t T able 6-11 System I/O Addresses (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â17 I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 2F0 - 2F7 Unused 2F8 - 2FF Infrared por t 300 - 31F Unused 320 - 36F Unused 370 - 377 Secondar y diskette driv e controller 378 - 37F P arallel por t (LPT1/def ault) 380 - 387 Unused 388 - 38B FM synthesizerâOPL3 38C - 3AF Unused 3B0 - 3BB V GA 3BC - 3BF Reser v ed (parallel por t/no EPP suppor t) 3C0 - 3DF V GA 3E0 - 3E1 PC Card controller in CPU 3E2 - 3E3 Unused 3E8 - 3EF Inter nal modem 3F0 - 3F7 âAâ diskette controller 3F8 - 3FF Ser ial por t (COM1/default) CF8 - CFB PCI configuration inde x register (PCIDIV O-1) CFC - CFF PCI configuration data register (PCIDIV O-1) T able 6-11 System I/O Addresses (Continued)
6â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s T able 6-12 System Memory Map Size Memory Address System Function 640 KB 00000000-0009FFFF Base memory 128 KB 000A0000-000BFFFF Video memor y 48 KB 000C0000-000CBFFF Video BIOS 160 KB 000C8000-000E7FFF Unused 64 KB 000E8000-000FFFFF System BIOS 15 MB 00100000-00FFFFFF Extended memor y 58 MB 01000000-047FFFFF Super e xtended memor y 58 MB 04800000-07FFFFFF Unused 2 MB 08000000-080FFFFF Video memor y (direct access) 4 GB 08200000-FFFEFFFF Un used 64 KB FFFF0000-FFFFFFFF System BIOS
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ1 A Co nnec tor P in As sig nmen ts Ta b l e A - 1 A udio-Out (Headphone) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 A udio out, left channel 3 Ground 2 A udio out, right channel
Aâ2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e A - 2 A udio-In (Micr ophone) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 A udio signal in 3 Ground 2 A udio signal in Ta b l e A - 3 Universal Serial Bus Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 5 VDC 3 Data 2 Data â 4 Ground
Connec tor P in Assi gnments Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ3 Ta b l e A - 4 External Monitor Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Red analog 9 5 VDC 2 Green analog 10 Ground 3 Blue analog 11 Monitor detect 4 Not connected 12 DDC 2B data 5 Ground 13 Horizontal sync 6 Ground analog 14 V e r tical sync 7 Ground analog 15 DDC 2B clock 8 Ground analog
Aâ4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e A - 5 RJ-45 (Netw ork) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 T ransmit 5 Unused 2 T ransmit â 6 Receive â 3 Receive 7 Unused 4 Unused 8 Unused
Connec tor P in Assi gnments Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ5 Ta b l e A - 6 RJ-11 (Modem) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Unused 4 Unused 2T i p 5U n u s e d 3 Ring 6 Unused
Aâ6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e A - 7 S-Video-Out Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 S-VHS color (C) signal 5 TV -CD 2 Composite video signal 6 S-VHS intensity ground 3 S-VHS intensity (Y) signal 7 Composite video ground 4 S-VHS color ground
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Bâ1 B P o w er C ord Set Requ irements 3-Con duc tor P o wer Cord Set The wide range input feature of the computer permits it to operate from any line v oltage from 100 to 120 or 220 to 240 volts A C. The po wer cord set included with the computer meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment is purchased. Po wer cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where the computer is used.
Bâ2 Maintenance and Se rvice Gui de P ow er Cor d Set Requir ements Gen eral R equiremen ts The requirements listed belo w are applicable to all countries. â The length of the po wer cord set must be at least 1.5 m (5.0 ft) and a maximum of 2.0 m (6.5 ft). â All po wer cord sets must be approv ed by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for e valuation in the country where the po wer cord set will be used. â The po wer cord sets must ha ve a minimum current capacity of 10 amps and a nominal v oltage rating of 125 or 250 V A C, as required by each countryâ s po wer system. â The appliance coupler must meet the mechanical conf iguration of an EN 60 320/IEC 320 Standard Sheet C13 connector for mating with the ap pliance inlet on the back of the computer .
P ow er Cor d Set R equirements Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Bâ3 Coun tr y-Spec ific Requirements 3-Conductor P ower Cor d Set Requirements Country/Region Accredited Agenc y Applicab le Note Number A ustralia EANSW 1 Au s t r i a OVE 1 Belgium C EBC 1 Canada CSA 2 Denmark D EMK O 1 Finland FIMK O 1 F rance UTE 1 Ger many VDE 1 Italy IMQ 1 Jap a n ME T I 3 â NOTES: 1. The fle xible cord m ust be <HAR> T ype HO5VV -F , 3-conductor , 1.0 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mark of the agency responsible f or e v aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 2. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype SPT -3 or equivalent, No . 18 A WG, 3-conductor . The wall plug must be a tw o-pole grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration. 3. The appliance coupler , flex ible cord, and w all plug must bear a âTâ mark and registration number in accordance with the J apanese Dentor i Law . The fle xib le cord must be T ype VCT or VCTF , 3-conductor , 1.00 mm² conductor size . The wall plug m ust be a two-po le grounding type with a J apanese Industrial Standard C8303 (7 A, 125 V) configuration.
Bâ4 Maintenance and Se rvice Gui de P ow er Cor d Set Requir ements Ko r e a E K 4 The Netherlands KE A 1 Norwa y NEMK O 1 P eopleâ s Repub lic of China CCC 5 Sweden SEMK O 1 Switzerland SEV 1 T aiwan BSMI 4 United Kingdom BSI 1 United States UL 2 â NOTES: 1. The fle xible cord m ust be <HAR> T ype HO5VV -F , 3-conductor , 1.0 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mark of the agency responsible f or e v aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 2. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype SPT -3 or equivalent, No . 18 A WG, 3-conductor . The wall plug must be a tw o-pole grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration. 3. The appliance coupler , flex ible cord, and w all plug must bear a âTâ mark and registration number in accordance with the J apanese Dentor i Law . The fle xib le cord must be T ype VCT or VCTF , 3-conductor , 1.00 mm² conductor size . The wall plug m ust be a two-po le grounding type with a J apanese Industrial Standard C8303 (7 A, 125 V) configuration. 4. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype R VV , 3-conductor , 0.75 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance co upler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mar k of the agency resp onsible f or ev aluation in the country where it will be used. 5. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype VC TF , 3-conductor , 0.75 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mar k of the agency respon sible f or ev aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 3-Conductor P ower Cor d Set Requirements (Continued) Country/Region Accredited Agenc y Applicab le Note Number
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ1 C Sc r e w Li sting This appendix provides specif ication and reference information for the scre ws and scre w locks used in the computer . All scre ws listed in this appendix are a v ailable in the Computer Scre w Kit, spare part number 403813-001, and the Display Scre w Kit, spare part number 403886-001. Phillips P M3 . 0Ã4.0 S cr ew L ocations Ta b l e C - 1 Phillips PM3.0Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 4 4.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the hard driv e fram e to the hard driv e (documented in Section 5.4 ) mm
Câ2 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Scr e w Listing Black Phillip s P M2 .5Ã6 .0 S cr ew L ocations Ta b l e C - 2 Blac k Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 5 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 Three screws that secure the hard driv e cov er to the computer (scre ws are captured on the cov er by C clips; documented in Section 5.4 ) 2 T wo scre ws that secure the memory/M ini Card module compar tment cov er to the computer (screws are captured on the cov er b y C clips; documented in Section 5.6 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ3 Silv er Phillips P M 2 .5Ã6 .0 S c r e w Locati ons Ta b l e C - 3 Silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 30 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the hard driv e to the computer (documented in Section 5.4 ) mm
Câ4 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Scr e w Listing Silv er Phillips P M 2 .5Ã6 .0 S cr ew L ocati on Ta b l e C - 3 Silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 30 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: One screw that secures the k e yboard assemb ly to the computer (documented in Section 5.11 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ5 Silv er Phillips P M 2 .5Ã6 .0 S cr ew L ocati on Ta b l e C - 3 Silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 30 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: One screw that secures the displa y asse mbly to the computer (documented in Section 5.14 ) mm
Câ6 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Scr e w Listing Silv er Phillips P M 2 .5Ã6 .0 S c r e w Locati ons Ta b l e C - 3 Silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 30 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 3 screws that secure the top co v e r to the computer (documented in Section 5.15 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ7 Silv er Phillips P M 2 .5Ã6 .0 S c r e w Locati ons Ta b l e C - 3 Silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 30 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 8 screws that secure the top co v e r to the computer (documented in Section 5.15 ) mm
Câ8 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Scr e w Listing Silv er Phillips P M 2 .5Ã6 .0 S c r e w Locati ons Ta b l e C - 3 Silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 30 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the base enclosur e suppor t brack et to the computer (documented in Section 5.16 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ9 Silv er Phillips P M 2 .5Ã6 .0 S c r e w Locati ons Ta b l e C - 3 Silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 30 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the system boar d to the computer (documented in Section 5.16 ) mm
Câ10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listing Phillips P M2 .5Ã6 . 0 Scr ew L ocatio n Ta b l e C - 3 Silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 30 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: One screw that secures the connector b oard to the computer (documented in Section 5.16 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ11 Phillips P M2 .5Ã6 . 0 Scr ew L ocatio ns Ta b l e C - 3 Silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 30 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the speak er asse mbly to the computer (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
Câ12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listing Silv er Phillips P M 2 .5Ã6 .0 S c r e w Locati ons Ta b l e C - 3 Silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 30 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the f an/heat sink assembly to the computer (documented in Section 5.21 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ13 Phillips P M2 .5Ã4. 0 Scr e w L ocati ons Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 17 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 3 screws that secure the s witch co v er to the computer (documented in Section 5.10 ) mm
Câ14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listing Phillips P M2 .5Ã4. 0 Scr e w L ocati ons Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 17 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 1 F our scre ws that secure the LED boa rd to the ke yboard frame (documented in Section 5.12 ) 2 Fiv e screws that secure the k eyboard to the k eyboard fr ame (documented in Section 5.13 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ15 Phillips P M2 .5Ã4. 0 Scr e w L ocati ons Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 17 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the displa y panel to the display enclosure (documented in Section 5.14 ) mm
Câ16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listing Phillips P M2 .5Ã4. 0 Scr e w L ocati ons Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 17 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the top co v e r to the computer (documented in Section 5.15 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ17 Phillips P M2 .5Ã4. 0 Sc r ew L ocation Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 17 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: One screw that secures the f an/heat si nk assembly and e xpansion por t brac ket to the system board (documented in Section 5.21 ) mm
Câ18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listing Phillips P M2 .0Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e C - 5 Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 15 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the optical driv e br ac k et to the optical drive (documented in Section 5.9 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ19 Phillips P M2 .0Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e C - 5 Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 15 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 8 screws that secure the displa y hinges to the displa y panel (documented in Section 5.14 ) mm
Câ20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listing Phillips P M2 .0Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocation Ta b l e C - 5 Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 15 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 4.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the displa y inv er ter to the display enclosure (documented in Section 5.14 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ21 Phillips P M2 .0Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e C - 5 Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 15 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the Bluetooth mo dule to the computer (documented in Section 5.17 ) mm
Câ2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr e w Listing Phillips P M2 .0Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e C - 5 Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 15 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the PC Card asse mbly to the system board (documented in Section 5.23 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ2 3 Phillips P M2 .5Ã13 . 0 Sc r e w L ocations Ta b l e C - 6 Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 15 13.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 1 One scre w that secures the optical dr iv e to the computer (documented in Section 5.9 ) 2 T wo scre ws that secure the s w itch co ver to the computer (documented in Section 5.10 ) mm
Câ2 4 Mainte nance and Servi ce Guide Scr e w Listing Phillips P M2 .5Ã13 . 0 Sc r e w L ocation Ta b l e C - 6 Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 15 13.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: One scre w that secures the ke yboard assemb ly to the computer (documented in Section 5.11 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de C â2 5 Phillips P M2 .5Ã13 . 0 Sc r e w L ocations Ta b l e C - 6 Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 15 13.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 5 screws that secure the top co v e r to the computer (documented in Section 5.15 ) mm
Câ2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr e w Listing Phillips P M2 .5Ã13 . 0 Sc r e w L ocations Ta b l e C - 6 Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 15 13.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 6 screws that secure the top co v e r to the computer (documented in Section 5.15 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ2 7 Phillips P M2 .5Ã9 . 0 Scr e w Locatio ns Ta b l e C - 7 Phillips PM2.5Ã9.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 6 9.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 5 screws that secure the displa y asse mbly to the computer (documented in Section 5.14 ) mm
Câ2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr e w Listing Phillips P M2 .5Ã9 . 0 Scr e w Locatio n Ta b l e C - 7 Phillips PM2.5Ã9.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 6 9.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: One screw that secures the system bo ard to the computer (documented in Section 5.16 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de C â2 9 Phillips P M2 .5Ã7 . 0 Scr e w Locations Ta b l e C - 8 Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 8 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 6 screws that secure the displa y bezel to the displa y assemb ly (documented in Section 5.14 ) mm
Câ30 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr e w Listing Phillips P M2 .5Ã7 . 0 Scr e w Locations Ta b l e C - 8 Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 8 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the displa y panel to the display enclosure (documented in Section 5.14 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ31 Slotted SM1. 5Ã9 . 0 Sc r e w L ocations Ta b l e C - 9 Slotted SM1.5Ã9.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 2 9.0 mm 1.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the f an/heat si nk assembly to the system board (documented in Section 5.21 ) mm
Câ3 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr e w Listing Phillips P M3 . 0Ã7 . 0 Sc r e w L ocati ons T able C-10 Phillips PM3.0Ã7.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 10 7.0 mm 3.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the f an/heat si nk assembly to the system board (documented in Section 5.21 ) mm
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Dâ1 D Dis pl a y C ompon ent Recy c lin g à W ARN ING: The backli ght contains mer cury . Cauti on should be e x er c ised w hen re mov ing and handling the backligh t to av oid damaging this component and ca using e xposur e to the merc ur y . à CA UTION: The pr ocedure s in this appendi x can r esult in damage to displa y components . T he only compo nents intended f or r ecy c ling purpo ses ar e the liquid c rys tal displa y (L CD) panel and the backlight . Car ef ul handling should be e x er c ised w hen r emo v ing these components . â Materials Disposal This HP product contains mercury in the display assembly backlight and may require special handling at end-of-life. Disposal of mercury may be regulated because of en vironmental considerations. For disposal or rec ycling information, contact your local authorities or visit the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www .eiae.org .
Dâ2 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling This appendix provides disassembl y instructions for the display assembly . The display assembly must be disassembled to gain access to the backlight 1 and the LCD panel 2 . â Disassembly procedures dif fer from one display assembly to another . The procedures provided in this appendix are general disassembly instructions. Specif ic details, such as scre w sizes, quantities, and locations, and co mponent shapes and sizes, can v ary from one computer model to another . Refer to Section 5.14, âDisplay Assembly , â for display assembly disassembly steps.
Displa y Componen t Rec yc l ing Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Dâ3 Perform the follo wing steps to disassemble the display assembly: 1. Remov e all scre w covers 1 and scre ws 2 that secure the display bezel to the display assembly . R emo v ing the Displa y Bez el Scr ew C o v ers and Sc re w s
Dâ4 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 2. Lift up and out on the left and right inside edges 1 and the top and bottom inside edges 2 of the display bezel until the bezel disengages from the display assembly . 3. Remov e the display bezel 3 . R emo v ing the Displa y Bez el
Displa y Componen t Rec yc l ing Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Dâ5 4. Disconnect all LCD panel cables 1 from the display in verter and remov e the in verter 2 . R emo v ing the Displa y In ve rter
Dâ6 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 5. Remov e all scre ws 1 that secure the LCD panel to the display enclosure. 6. Remov e the LCD panel 2 from the display enclosure. R emo v ing the L CD P anel
Displa y Componen t Rec yc l ing Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Dâ7 7. T urn the LCD panel upside do wn. 8. Remov e all scre ws that secure the LCD panel frame to the LCD panel. R emo v ing the L CD P anel F r ame Sc r ew s
Dâ8 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 9. Use a sharp-edged tool to cut the tape 1 that secures the side of the LCD panel to the LCD panel frame. 10. Remov e the LCD panel frame 2 from the display panel. R emo v ing the L CD P anel F r ame
Displa y Componen t Rec yc l ing Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Dâ9 11. Remov e the scre ws 1 that secure the backlight co ver to the LCD panel. 12. Lift the top edge of the backlight cov er 2 and swing it forward. 13. Remov e the backlight co ver . R emo v ing the Back light C o v er
Dâ10 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 14. T urn the LCD panel right-side up. 15. Remov e the backlight cables 1 from the clip 2 in the LCD panel. R eleasing the Bac kligh t Cable s
Displa y Componen t Rec yc l ing Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Dâ11 16. T urn the LCD panel upside do wn. 17. Remov e the backlight frame from the LCD panel. R emo v ing the Back light F rame
Dâ12 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling à W ARN ING: The backli ght contains mer cury . Cauti on should be e x er c ised w hen re mov ing and handling the backligh t to av oid damaging this component and ca using e xposur e to the merc ur y . 18. Slide the backlight out of the backlight frame. R emo v ing the Back light
Displa y Componen t Rec yc l ing Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Dâ13 19. Disconnect the display cable 1 from the LCD panel. 20. Remov e the scre ws 2 that secure the LCD panel to the LCD rear panel. 21. Release the LCD panel 3 from the LCD rear panel. 22. Release the tape 4 that secures the LCD panel to the LCD rear panel. R eleasing the L CD P anel
Dâ14 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 23. Remov e the LCD panel. R emo v ing the L CD P anel 24. Recycle the backlight and LCD panel.
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde xâ1 In de x 1394 port 1â11 A arrow keys 1â15 audio troubleshooting 2â23 audio-in jack location 1â9 pin assignments Aâ2 audio-out jack location 1â9 pin assignments Aâ1 B base enclosure, spare part number 3â7, 3â22 battery bay 1â13, 1â22 battery light 1â7 battery pack removal 5â5 spare part number 3â7, 3â20 , 5â5 specifications 6â7 battery release latch 1â22 Bluetooth module removal 5â54 spare part number 3â7, 3â20 , 5â54 Bluetooth module cable illustrated 3â15 removal 5â56 bottom components 1â22 Bracket Kit contents 3â5, 3â22 spare part number 3â5 , 3â22 C Cable Kit components 3â15 spare part number 3â15, 3â22 cables, service considerations 4â2 caps lock key 1â15 CMOS clearing 1â4 components bottom 1â22 front 1â6 keyboard 1â14 left-side 1â10, 1â12 right-side 1â8 top 1â16 , 1â18, 1â21 computer feet illustrated 3â14 locations 5â9
Inde xâ2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Inde x Computer Setup Advanced Menu 2â6 defaults 2â2 File Menu 2â3 overview 2â1 Security Menu 2â4 Tools Menu 2â5 computer specifications 6â1 connector pin assignments audio-in Aâ2 audio-out Aâ1 external monitor Aâ3 RJ-11 Aâ5 RJ-45 Aâ4 S-Video-out Aâ6 Universal Serial Bus (USB) Aâ2 connectors, service considerations 4â2 D design overview 1â24 Digital Media Slot 1â11 Digital Media Slot light 1â11 disassembly sequence chart 5â3 diskette drive OS loading problems 2â21 precautions 4â3 display assembly removal 5â30 spare part numbers 3â3, 3â20 , 3â25 , 5â30 specifications 6â3, 6â4 Display Hinge Kit components 3â13, 3â23, 3â26 , 5â33 spare part number 3â13, 3â23 , 3â26 , 5â33 display hinge support bracket illustrated 3â5 removal 5â49 display inverter board removal 5â38 spare part number 3â13, 3â22 , 3â26 , 5â33 Display Label Kit, spare part number 3â13, 3â23, 5â33 Display Panel Kit, spare part number 3â13, 3â23, 3â26, 5â33 Display Plastics Kit components 3â13, 3â22, 3â26 , 5â33 spare part number 3â13, 3â22 , 3â26 , 5â33 display release latch 1â7 Display Screw Kit, spare part number 3â13, 3â23, 5â33 display switch 1â16 docking device, troubleshooting 2â16 drive light 1â7 drives, preventing damage 4â3 DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive OS loading problems 2â22 precautions 4â3 removal 5â17
Inde x Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde xâ3 spare part number 3â5, 3â17 , 3â20 , 5â17 specifications 6â8 DVD±RW and CD-RW Double Layer Combo Drive OS loading problems 2â22 precautions 4â3 removal 5â17 spare part number 3â5, 3â17 , 3â20 , 5â17 specifications 6â9, 6â10 E electrostatic discharge 4â4, 4â8 expansion port 2 1â11 expansion port 2 bracket removal 5â67 spare part number 3â5, 3â25 ExpressCard assembly removal 5â50 spare part number 3â7, 3â22 ExpressCard slot 1â9 ExpressCard slot bezel illustrated 3â14 removal 5â48 external monitor port location 1â10 pin assignments Aâ3 F f1 to f12 keys 1â15 fan assembly, spare part number 3â26 fan/heat sink assembly removal 5â64 spare part number 3â5 , 3â25 , 5â64 features 1â2 feet illustrated 3â14 locations 5â9 flowcharts, troubleshooting no audio 2â23, 2â24 no network/modem connection 2â28 no OS loading 2â17 no OS loading from diskette drive 2â21 no OS loading from hard drive 2â18, 2â19, 2â20 no OS loading from optical drive 2â22 no power 2â10 , 2â12 , 2â13 no video 2â14, 2â15 nonfunctioning device 2â25 nonfunctioning docking device 2â16 nonfunctioning keyboard 2â26 nonfunctioning pointing device 2â27 fn key 1â15 front components 1â6
Inde xâ4 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Inde x G grounding equipment and methods 4â7 H hard drive OS loading problems 2â18 precautions 4â3 removal 5â6 spare part numbers 3â7, 3â17 , 3â25 , 3â26 , 5â6 specifications 6â5 hard drive bay 1â23 hard drive cover illustrated 3â14 removal 5â6 headphone jack, pin assignments Aâ1 headset, spare part number 3â18 , 3â20 HP Mobile Remote Control, spare part number 3â18, 3â23 I I/O address specifications 6â15 interrupt specifications 6â13 K keyboard removal 5â28 spare part numbers 3â3, 3â20 , 3â21 , 5â28 troubleshooting 2â26 keyboard components 1â14 keyboard frame removal 5â22 spare part number 3â3 , 3â22 , 5â22 spare part numbers 5â22 keypad keys 1â15 L LED board removal 5â26 spare part number 3â3 , 3â25 , 5â26 left-side components 1â10, 1â12 M mass storage devices, spare part numbers 3â16 memory map specifications 6â18 memory module removal 5â10 spare part numbers 3â11, 3â20 , 3â23 , 3â25 , 5â10 memory/Mini Card module compartment cover illustrated 3â14 location 1â23 removal 5â11 microphone jack, pin assignments Aâ2 Mini Card communications module removal 5â13 spare part numbers 3â9, 3â11 , 3â23 , 3â24 , 3â26
Inde x Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde xâ5 modem cable illustrated 3â15 removal 5â57 modem jack location 1â13 pin assignments Aâ5 modem, troubleshooting 2â28 N network jack location 1â10 pin assignments Aâ4 network, troubleshooting 2â28 nonfunctioning device, troubleshooting 2â16, 2â25 num lock key 1â15 O optical drive location 1â9, 1â22 OS loading problems 2â22 precautions 4â3 removal 5â17 spare part numbers 3â5, 3â17 specifications 6â8 optical drive connector board removal 5â53 spare part number 3â5, 3â25 P packing precautions 4â5 Pad Kit, spare part number 3â22 password clearing 1â4 PC Card assembly removal 5â72 spare part number 3â7 , 3â22 , 5â72 PC Card slot 1â11 PC Card slot bezel, illustrated 3â14 plastic parts 4â2 Plastics Kit components 3â14 spare part number 3â7 , 3â14 , 3â26 pointing device, troubleshooting 2â27 power button 1â17 power connector 1â10 power connector cable illustrated 3â15 removal 5â69 power cord set requirements Bâ2 spare part numbers 3â19, 3â21 power light 1â7, 1â17 power management features 1â5 power supply, spare part number 3â19 power, troubleshooting 2â10 precautions DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive 4â3 DVD±RW and CD-RW Double Layer Combo Drive 4â3
Inde xâ6 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Inde x hard drive 4â3 optical drive 4â3 processor removal 5â70 spare part numbers 3â5, 3â24 , 3â25 , 5â70 Q Quick Launch calculator button 1â20 R remote control, spare part number 3â23 removal/replacement preliminaries 4â1 procedures 5â1 right-side components 1â8 RJ-11 jack location 1â13 pin assignments Aâ5 RJ-45 jack location 1â10 pin assignments Aâ4 RTC battery removal 5â16 spare part number 3â7, 3â22 , 5â16 S Screw Kit contents Câ1 spare part numbers 3â13, 3â18 , 3â22 , 3â23 , 5â33 , Câ1 screw listing Câ1 security cable slot 1â13 serial number 3â1, 5â2 service considerations 4â2 speaker assembly removal 5â61 spare part number 3â5 , 3â22 , 5â61 speakers, location 1â7 specifications battery pack 6â7 computer 6â1 display assembly 6â3, 6â4 DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive 6â8 DVD±RW and CD-RW Double Layer Combo Drive 6â9, 6â10 hard drive 6â5 I/O addresses 6â15 interrupts 6â13 memory map 6â18 optical drive 6â8 system DMA 6â12 static shielding materials 4â8 S-Video-out jack location 1â10 pin assignments Aâ6 switch cover removal 5â20 spare part number 3â3 , 3â22 , 5â20 system board removal 5â47 spare part number 3â5 , 3â24 , 5â47 system DMA 6â12 system memory map 6â18
Inde x Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde xâ7 T tools required 4â1 top components 1â16, 1â18, 1â21 top cover removal 5â40 spare part number 3â3, 3â22 , 5â40 TouchPad cable 3â15 transporting precautions 4â5 troubleshooting audio 2â23 Computer Setup 2â2 docking device 2â16 flowcharts 2â7 keyboard 2â26 modem 2â28 network 2â28 nonfunctioning device 2â16 , 2â25 OS loading 2â17 overview 2â1 pointing device 2â27 power 2â10 video 2â14 U Universal Serial Bus (USB) port location 1â9, 1â11 pin assignments Aâ2 unknown password 1â4 USB board removal 5â59 spare part number 3â5, 3â25 , 5â59 USB board cable illustrated 3â15 removal 5â60 USB digital drive, spare part number 3â17, 3â18, 3â20 USB travel mouse, spare part number 3â18, 3â20 V vent, locations 1â13, 1â23 video troubleshooting 2â14 volume buttons 1â17 W Windows applications key 1â15 Windows logo key 1â15 wireless antenna removal 5â39 spare part number 3â13, 3â22 , 5â33 wireless button 1â17 wireless light 1â13, 1â16 workstation precautions 4â6
© Copyright 2006 He wlett-P ackard Dev elopment Compan y , L.P . Microsoft and W indows are U.S. re gistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark o wned by its proprietor and used b y He wlett-Packard Compan y under license. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor . The information contained herein is su bject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompan ying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty . HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Maintenance and S erv ice Gui de HP P av i lio n dv8 300 Not ebook PC F irst E dition: F ebruary 2006 Document P ar t Numb er : 3 98 6 7 7 -001
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de iii Cont e nt s 1 Product Description 1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â2 1.2 Resetting the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â4 1.3 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â5 1.4 External Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â6 1.5 Design Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â24 2 Troubleshooting 2.1 Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â1 Accessing Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â2 Computer Setup Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â2 Selecting from the File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â3 Selecting from the Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â4 Selecting from the Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â5 Selecting from the Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â6 2.2 Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â7
i v Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Con ten ts 3 Illustrated Parts Catalog 3.1 Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â1 3.2 Computer Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â2 3.3 Display Assembly Subcomponent s . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â12 3.4 Plastics Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â14 3.5 Cable Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â15 3.6 Mass Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â16 3.7 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â18 3.8 Sequential Part Number Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â20 4 Removal and Replacement Preliminaries 4.1 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â1 4.2 Service Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Plastic Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 4.3 Preventing Damage to Removable Drives . . . . . . . . 4â3 4.4 Preventing Electrostatic Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â4 4.5 Packaging and Transporting Precautions . . . . . . . . . 4â5 4.6 Workstation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â6 4.7 Grounding Equipment and Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â7
Cont ent s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de v 5 Removal and Replacement Procedures 5.1 Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â2 5.2 Disassembly Sequence Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â3 5.3 Preparing the Computer for Disassembly . . . . . . . . . 5â4 5.4 Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â6 5.5 Computer Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â9 5.6 Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â10 5.7 Mini Card Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â13 5.8 RTC Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â16 5.9 Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â17 5.10 Switch Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â20 5.11 Keyboard Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â22 5.12 LED Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â26 5.13 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â28 5.14 Display Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â30 5.15 Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â40 5.16 System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â47 5.17 Bluetooth Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â54 5.18 Modem Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â57 5.19 USB Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â59 5.20 Speaker Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â61 5.21 Fan/Heat Sink Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â64 5.22 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â70 5.23 PC Card Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â72
v i Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Con ten ts 6 Specifications A Connector Pin Assignments B Power Cord Set Requirements C Screw Listing D Display Component Recycling Index
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â1 1 Pr oduc t D esc ription The HP Pa vilion dv8300 Notebook PC offers adv a nced modularity , Intel® Pentium® M processors, and extensi ve multimedia support. HP P av ilion d v8 300 Notebook PC
1â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc r iption 1.1 F e a t u r e s â Intel Pentium M 2.17-, 2.0-, 1.83-GHz Single Code processors, or Intel Penti um M 1.66-GHz Dual Code processor , varying b y computer model â 17.0-inch, WSXGA , TFT (1680 à 1050) with BrightV iew or 17.0-inch, WXGA , TFT (1440 à 900) with BrightV iew display , v arying by computer model â 120-, 100-, or 80-GB high-capacity hard dri v e, v arying by computer model â 256-MB DDR1 synchronous DRAM (SDRAM) at 333 MHz, expandable to 2.0 GB â Microsoft® W indows® XP Home Edition or W indows XP Professional, v arying b y computer model â Full-size W indows k e yboard with full-size numeric ke ypad â T ouchPad pointing de vice, including dedicated v ertical scroll region â Integrated 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet local area network (LAN) netw ork interface card (NIC) with RJ-45 jack â Integrated high-speed 56K modem with RJ-11 jack â Integrated wireless support for Mini Card IEEE 802.11a/b/g WLAN de vice â Support for one T ype I or T ype II PC Card slot, with support for both 32-bit (CardBus) and 16-bit PC Cards â Support for ExpressCard slot
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â3 â External 90-watt A C adapter with 3-wire po wer cord â 8-cell Li-Ion battery pack â Stereo speakers â V olume up, v olume mute, and v olume do wn b uttons â QuickPlay b uttons â Support for the follo wing optical dri v es: â D VD±R W and CD-R W Double Layer Combo Dri ve with LightScribe â D VD±R W and CD-R W Double Layer Combo Dri ve â D VD/CD-R W Combo Dri ve â Connectors: â Audio-in (microphone) â Audio-out (headphone) â Digital Media Slot â Expansion port 2 â ExpressCard slot â External monitor â IEEE 1394 â PC Card â Po wer â RJ-11 (modem) â RJ-45 (network) â S-V ideo-out â Uni versal Serial Bus (USB) v . 2.0 (4 ports)
1â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc r iption 1 .2 R eset tin g t he C omp uter If the computer you are servicing has an unkno wn password, follo w these steps to clear the password. These steps also clear CMOS: 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3, âPreparing the Computer for Disassembly , â for more information). 2. Remov e the real-time clock (R TC) battery (refer to Section 5.8, âR TC Battery , â for more information on removing and replacing the R TC battery). 3. W ait approximately 5 minutes. 4. Replace the R TC battery and reassemble the computer . 5. Connect A C power to the computer . Do not reinsert any battery packs at this time. 6. T urn on the computer . All passwords and all CMOS settings ha v e been cleared.
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â5 1. 3 P o w e r M a n a g e m e n t The computer comes with po wer management features that extend battery operating time and conserv e po wer . The computer supports the follo wing po wer management features: â Standby â Hibernation â Setting customization by the user â Hotke ys for setting the le v el of performance â Battery calibration â Lid switch standby/resume â Po wer b utton â Adv anced Conf iguration and Po wer Management (A CPM) compliance
1â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc r iption 1 .4 Ex ternal C ompon ents The external components on the front of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-1. F r ont Components
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â7 Ta b l e 1 - 1 Fr ont Components Item Component Function 1P o w e r l i g h t â On: Computer is tur ned on. â Off: Computer is off or in hiber nation. â Blinking: Computer is in standby . 2B a t t e r y l i g h t â On: A batter y pack is charging or is close to full charge capacity . â Off: If the computer is plugged into an e xter nal pow er source, the light is turned off when all batteries in the computer are fully charged. If the computer is not plugged into an e xter nal po wer source, the light sta ys off until the batter y reaches a low-battery condition. â Blinking: A batter y pack that is the only av ailable pow er sour ce has reached a low-battery condition. When the batter y reaches a critical lo w-batter y condition, the batter y light begins blinking quic kly . 3 Drive light On or blinking: The internal hard dr iv e or an optical drive is being accessed. 4 Speakers Produce stereo sound. 5 Displa y release latch Opens the computer .
1â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc r iption The external components on the right side of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-2. R igh t-Side C ompo nents
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â9 Ta b l e 1 - 2 Right-Side Components Item Component Function 1 ExpressCard slot Suppor ts an optional ExpressCard. 2A u d i o - o u t (headphone) jack Connects an optional headphone or pow ered stereo speak ers. Also connects the audio function of an audio/video de vice , such as a tele vision or VCR. 3 A udio-in (microphone) jack Connects an optional stereo microphone. 4 USB por ts (2) Connect optional USB de vices. 5 Optical drive Suppor ts an optical disc, such as a CD or D VD .
1â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc r iption The external components on the left side of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-3. Lef t -S ide Com po ne nt s Ta b l e 1 - 3 Left-Side Components Item Component Function 1 P ower connector Connects the A C adapter cab le. 2 Monitor por t Connects an optional V GA monitor or projector . 3 S-Video-out jack Connects the vi deo function of an optional S-Video de vice, such as a tele vision, VCR, or video capture card. 4 RJ-45 (network) jack Connects a network cable (not included).
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â11 5 Expansion por t 2 Connects t he computer to an optional e xpansion product. â The computer has only one expansion port. The term expansion port 2 describes the type of expansion port. 6 USB por ts (2) Connect optional USB de vices. 7 1394 por t (4-pin) Connects an optional 1394a de vice such as a scanner , a digital camera, or a digital camcorder . 8 Digital Media Slot light On: An optional digital card is being accessed. 9 Digital Media Slot Suppor ts the follo wing optional digital cards: Secure Digital (SD) Memor y Card, SD I/O Card, Memor y Stick, Memory Stick Pro , MultiMediaCard, xD-Picture Card, and Smar tMedia. 10 PC Card slot Suppor ts an optional T ype I or T ype II 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Card. Ta b l e 1 - 3 Left-Side Components (Continued) Item Component Function
1â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc r iption The external components on the rear panel of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-4. Re a r P a ne l Co m p on e n t s
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â13 Ta b l e 1 - 4 Rear P anel Components Item Component Function 1 Security cable slot Attaches an op tional security cable to the computer . â The purpose of security solutions is to act as a deterrent. These solutions do not prevent the product from being mishandled or stolen. 2 RJ-11 (modem) jack Connects a modem cab le (not included). 3 Batter y ba y Holds a batter y pac k. 4 Wireless light On: One or mo re inter nal wireless de vices hav e been tur ned on. â To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up. 5 V ent Provides airflo w to cool internal components. Ã T o pre v ent ov erheating, do not obstruct vents . Do not allow a hard surf ace, such as a printer , or a soft surf ace, such as pillo ws or thick rugs or clothing, to bloc k airflow .
1â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc r iption The standard ke yboard components of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-5. St andar d K ey boar d Co mponents
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â15 T able 1-5 Standar d Ke yboar d Components Item Component Function 1 f1 to f12 ke ys (12) P erf or m system and application tasks. When combined with fn , function ke ys perf or m additional tasks as hotk eys . 2 caps lock ke y Enables caps loc k and turns on the caps loc k light. 3 fn ke y Combines with other ke ys to perf orm system tasks as hotke ys . F or e xample , pressing fn f7 decreases screen brightness. 4 Windows logo k e y Displa ys the Microsoft Windows Star t menu. 5W i n d o w s applications ke y Displa ys a shor tcut menu f or items beneath the pointer . 6 Arrow k e ys Mov e the cursor around the screen. 7 Numeric ke ypad ke ys (16) Can be used like the ke ys on an external numeric ke ypad. 8 num lock ke y Enables n umeric lock, tur ns on the embedded numeric ke ypad, and turns on the num loc k light.
1â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc r iption The computer top components are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-6. To p C o m p o n e n t s T able 1-6 T op Components Item Component Function 1 Displa y s witch Initiates standb y if the displa y is closed when the computer is on. 2 Wireless light On: One or more inter nal wireless de vices hav e been tur ned on. â To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up.
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â17 3 Wireless button T ur ns the wireless functionality on or off , but does not create a wireless connection. â To establish a wireless connection, a wireless network must already be set up. 4P o w e r l i g h t â On: The computer is on. â Blinking: The computer is in standby . â Off: The computer is off or in hiber nation. P ower b utton When the computer is â Off , press to turn on the computer . â On, press to enter hiber nation. â In standby , briefly press to exit standb y . â In hiber nation, briefly press to exit hiber nation. If the computer ha s stopped responding and Microsoft® Windows® shutdo wn procedures cannot be used, press and hold the pow er button f or at least 5 seconds to tur n off the computer . 5 V olume down b utton Decreases speaker v olume. 6 V olume mute b utton Mutes or restores speaker v olume . 7 V olume up button Increases speaker v olume. T able 1-6 T op Components (Continued) Item Component Function
1â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc r iption The Quick Play and Quick Launch b uttons are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-7. To p C o m p o n e n t s
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â19 T able 1-7 Quic kPla y and Quick Launc h Button Components Item Component Function 1 D VD button Default button functions without Quic kPlay software: When the computer is â On: Opens the def ault D VD application to star t a D VD in the optical drive . â Off: No function. â In standby: Resumes from standb y into Windows . â In hiber nation: Restores from hiber nation into Windows . Button functions with QuickPla y software: When the computer is â On: Opens the def ault D VD application to star t a D VD in the optical drive . â Off: Opens QuickPla y to star t a D VD in the optical drive . â In standby: Resumes from standb y into Windows . â In hiber nation: Restores from hiber nation into Windows .
1â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Pr oduct Desc r iption 2 Media Button Default b utton functions without Quic kPlay software: When the computer is â On: Opens the music application or the Media menu, allo wing you to select a multimedia application. â Off: No function. â In standby: Resumes from standb y into Windows . â In hiber nation: Restores from hiber nation into Windows . Button functions with QuickPla y software: When the computer is â On: Opens the music application or the Media menu, allo wing you to select a multimedia application. â Off: Opens the music application or the Media menu, allo wing you to select a multimedia application. â In standby: Resumes from standb y into Windows . â In hiber nation: Restores from hiber nation into Windows . 3 Quick Launch calculator button Opens the Microsoft Windows calculator . This b utton can also be reassigned to an Inter net or network des tination or to an y software application or data file . â When you press the Quick Launch calculator button, num lock is enabled. T able 1-7 Quic kPla y and Quic k Launch Button Components (Continued) Item Component Function
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â21 The computer T ouchPad components are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-8. T ouchP ad Components T able 1-8 T ouchP ad Components Item Component Function 1 Left and right T ouchP ad buttons Function lik e the left and right buttons on an e xternal mouse. 2 T ouchP ad Mov es the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Can be set to perf or m other mouse functions, such as scrolling, selecting, and double-clic king. 3 T ouchP ad ver tical scroll zone Scrolls up or down.
1â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Pr oduct Desc r iption The external components on the bottom of the computer are sho wn belo w and described in T able 1-9. Bottom Components Ta b l e 1 - 9 Bottom Components Item Component Function 1 Optical drive Suppor ts an optical disc, such as a C D o r DV D. 2 Labels area Contains the serial number and other inf ormation labels. 3 Batter y pac k release latch Releases a batter y pac k from the batter y ba y . 4 Batter y ba y Holds a batter y pac k.
Pr oduct De sc r iption Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 1â2 3 5 V ents (2) Provide airflo w to cool inter nal components. Ã T o pre v ent ov erheating, do not obstruct vents . Do not allow a hard surf ace, such as a printer , or a soft surf ace, such as pillo ws or thick rugs or clothing, to b lock airflow . 6 Memor y/Mini Card module compar tment cov er â Contains 2 memor y module slots that suppor t replaceable memory modules. The n umber of preinstalled memor y modules v aries by computer model. â Holds an optional wireless LAN de vice (select models only). Ã T o pre v ent an unresponsiv e system and the displa y of a warning message, install only a Mini Card de vice authorized f or use in your computer b y the gov er nmental agency that regulates wireless de vices in your country . If y ou install an unauthorized de vice and then receiv e a warning message, remov e the de vice to restore computer functionality . Then contact Customer Care. 7 Hard drive ba y Holds the inter nal hard drive. Ta b l e 1 - 9 Bottom Components (Continued) Item Component Function
1â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Pr oduct Desc r iption 1. 5 D e s i g n O v e r v i e w This section presents a design ov ervie w of key parts and features of the computer . Refer to Chapter 3, âIllustrated Parts Catalog, â to identify replacement parts, and Chapter 5, âRemo v al and Replacement Procedures, â for disassembly steps. The system board provides the follo wing device connections: â Intel Pentium M processors â Audio â Digital media card â Display â ExpressCard â Hard dri v e â K e yboard â Memory module â Mini Card communications de vices â PC Card â To u c h P a d à CA UTION: T o pr operl y v entilate the com puter , allo w at least a 7 .6 -cm (3-inc h) c lear ance on the left and r igh t sides o f the compu ter . The computer uses an electric fan for v entilation. The fan is controlled by a temperature sensor and is designed to be turned on automatically when high temperature conditions exist. These conditions are af fected b y high external temperatures, system po wer consumption, po wer management/battery conserv ation conf igurations, battery fast char ging, and software applications. Exhaust air is displaced through the ventilation grill located on the left side of the computer .
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â1 2 T r oubl eshooting à W ARN ING: Only author i z ed tec hnic ians trained b y HP should repair this equipmen t . All tr ouble shooting and r epair pr ocedur es ar e detailed to allo w onl y subas sembl y-/module -lev el r epair . Becaus e of the comple x ity of the indi v idual boar ds and suba ssembli es , do not attempt to mak e r epair s at the component le v el or modif i cations to an y print ed w ir ing boar d. Im pr oper r epairs can c r eate a safety ha z ard . An y indicati on of component r eplacement or pr inted w ir ing boar d modif icati on may v oid an y warr ant y or e x change allo wances . 2. 1 C omp uter Setu p Computer Setup is a preinstalled, R OM-based utility that can be used e ven when the operating system is not w orking or will not load. If the operating system is working, the computer restarts the operating system after you exit Computer Setup. â Pointing de vices are not supporte d in Computer Setup; you must use the ke yboard to na vigate and make selections. The menu tables later in this chapter provide an o v ervie w of Computer Setup options.
2â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T roubleshooting Acce ssing Compute r Set up The information and settings in Computer Setup are accessed from the File, Security , T ools, and Advanced menus. 1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer . Press f10 while the F10 = Based Setup message is displayed in the lo wer -left corner of the screen. â T o change the language, press f2 . â T o view na vigation information, press f1 . â T o return to the Computer Setup menu, press esc . 2. Select the File , Security , T o ols , or Advanced menu. 3. T o exit Computer Setup, choose one of the follo wing: â T o exit without sa ving any changes, use the arro w keys to select File > Ignor e changes and exit , and then follo w the instructions on the screen. â T o exit and sa ve all the settings you ha ve entered, use the arro w ke ys to select File > Sa ve changes and exit , and then follo w the instructions on the screen. Y our preferences are set when you e xit Computer Setup and go into ef fect when the computer restarts. Com pu ter Setup Defaults T o return all settings in Computer Setup to the v alues that were set at the factory: 1. Open Computer Setup by turning on or restarting the computer . Press f10 while the F10 = Based Setup message is displayed in the lo wer -left corner of the screen. â T o change the language, press f2 . â T o view na vigation information, press f1 . 2. Use the arro w ke ys to select File > Restor e defaults . 3. Select the Restore Defaults check box.
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â3 4. T o confirm the restoration, press f10 . 5. Select File > Sa ve changes and exit , and then follo w the instructions on the screen. When the computer restarts, the factory settings are restored, and any identif ication information you hav e entered is sa ved. Selecti ng fr om the F ile Me nu Ta b l e 2 - 1 File Menu Select T o Do This System Inf or mation â Vie w identification inf or mation about the computer and any battery packs in the system. â Vie w specification inf or mation about the processor , memor y and cache size, video re vision, ke yboard controller version, and system ROM. Sav e to floppy Sav e system configuration settings to a diskette . Restore to flopp y Restore system configuration settings from a diskette . Restore def aults Replace configurat ion settings in Computer Setup with f actor y def ault se ttings. (Identification inf or mation is retained.) Ignore changes and e xit Cancel ch anges entered during the current session. Then e xit an d restar t the computer . Sav e changes and exit Sav e changes entered during the current session. Then e xit and restar t t he computer . The changes you sa v e are to into ef f ect when the computer restar ts.
2â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T roubleshooting Selec ting from the Sec urity Menu Ta b l e 2 - 2 Security Menu Select T o Do This Administrator pass word Enter , change , or delete an HP Administrator pass word. P ower-on pass word Enter , change, or delete a pow er-on pass word. P a ss word options â Enable/Disab le stringent securi ty . â Enable/Disab le required pass word on restar t. DriveLoc k pass words Enable/disab le DriveLoc k; change a Dr iv eLock user or master pass word. â DriveLock Settings are accessible only when you enter Comput er Setup by turning on (not restarting) the computer. Smar t Card Secur ity Enable/disab le po wer-on suppor t f or smar t cards. â This f eature is suppor ted by select smar t card readers only . Embedded Security â Enab le/Disable the embedded security chip . â Restore embedded security chip to factory settings. â Enable/Disab le po wer-on authentication suppor t. â Enable/Disab le automatic DriveLoc k. â Reset pow er-on authen tication credential â Embedded Security settings are accessible only if the computer is equipped with an embedded security chip. De vice security Enable/Disab le de vices in the system. Enable NIC f or inclusion in MultiBoot. System IDs Enter user-defin ed identification v alues.
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â5 Selec ting fr om t he T ools Menu Ta b l e 2 - 3 To o l s M e n u Select T o Do This HDD Self T est options Run a quic k or comprehensiv e self-test on any hard drive in the system. Batter y Inf or mation Vie w inf or mation about any battery packs in the computer . Memor y Check â Run a self-test on memor y modules in the computer . â Vie w inf or mation about memor y modules installed in the computer .
2â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T roubleshooting Selec ting from th e Ad v anced Menu Ta b l e 2 - 4 Adv anced Menu Select T o Do This Language (or press f2 ) Change the Computer Setup language . Boot options â Enable/Disab le MultiBoot, which sets a star tup sequence that can include most bootable de vices and media in the system. â Set the boot order . De vice options â Swap the functions of the fn k e y and left ctrl key . â Enable/Disab le multiple pointing de vices at star tup . (T o set the comp uter to suppor t only a single, usually nonstandard, pointing de vice at star tup , select Disable .) â Enable/Disab le USB legacy suppor t f or a USB ke yboard, mouse , and hu b . When USB legacy suppor t is enabled â A USB k eyboard, mouse , and hub work e v en when a Windows oper ating system is not loaded. â The computer star ts from a bootable hard drive , diskette driv e diskette , or CD , CD-R W , or D VD inser ted into a dr ive connected b y a USB connector to the computer or to an optional docking de vice . â Select a parallel por t mode: EPP (Enhanced P a rallel P or t), standard, bidirectional, or ECP (Enhanced Capabilities P or t). â Enable/Disab le all settings in the SpeedStep window . (When Disable is selected, the computer runs in Ba tter y Optimized mode.)
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â7 2.2 T roubl eshooting Flo wc har ts Ta b l e 2 - 5 T roubleshooting Flo wch ar ts Overview Flowchart Description 2.1 âFlowchar t 2.1âInitial T roub leshootingâ 2.2 âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ower , P ar t 1â 2.3 âFlowchar t 2.3âNo P ower , P ar t 2â 2.4 âFlowchar t 2.4âNo P ower , P ar t 3â 2.5 âFlowchar t 2.5âNo P ower , P ar t 4â 2.6 âFlowchar t 2.6âNo Video , P ar t 1â 2.7 âFlowchar t 2.7âNo Video , P ar t 2â 2.8 âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Do c king De vice (if applicab le)â 2.9 âFlowchar t 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loadingâ 2.10 âFlowchar t 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 1â 2.11 âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 2â 2.12 âFlowchar t 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 3â 2.13 âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Disk ette Dr iv eâ
2â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T roubleshooting Flowchart Description 2.14 âFlowchar t 2.14âNo OS Loading, Optical Driveâ 2.15 âFlowchar t 2.15âNo A udio , P ar t 1â 2.16 âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , P ar t 2â 2.17 âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De viceâ 2.18 âFlowchar t 2.18âNonfunctioning K eyboardâ 2.19 âFlowchar t 2.19âNonfunctioning P ointing Deviceâ 2.20 âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connectionâ Ta b l e 2 - 5 T roubleshooting Flo wc har ts Overview (Continued)
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â9 Flo wc h art 2. 1âInitial T roub leshootin g Connecting to network or modem? Begin troubleshooting. Is there power? Is the OS loading? Is there video? (no boot) Is there sound? Beeps, LEDs, or error messages? Keyboard/ pointing device working? Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunc- tioning De vice. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ower , Pa r t 1 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â All drives working? Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N End N N N Go to âFlowchar t 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loading. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.15âNo A udio , Pa r t 1 . â Go to âFlowchart 2.18âNonfunc- tioning K e yboardâ or âFlowchart 2.19âNonfunc- tioning P ointing De vice. â Check LED board, speaker connections. Go to âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connection. â
2â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T roubleshooting Flo wc h art 2.2âN o P ow er , P ar t 1 1. Reseat the power cables in the docking device and at the AC outlet. 2. Ensure the AC power source is active. 3. Ensure that the power strip is working. Done Remove from docking device (if applicable). Po we r up on batter y power? Po we r up on AC power? Power up in docking device? Po we r u p on batter y power? Po we r up in docking device? Done Reset power .* Reset power .* Po we r up on AC power? N Y Y N N Y N N Y Y YN 1. On select models, there is a separate reset button. 2. On select models, the computer can be reset using the standby switch and either the lid switch or the main power switch. *NOTES Go to âFlowchart 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.3âNo P ower , Pa r t 2 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Docking De vice (if applicable). â No power (power LED is off).
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â11 Flo wc h ar t 2.3âNo P o w er , P ar t 2 Continued from âFlowchar t 2.2âNo P ower , Pa r t 1 . â Visually check for debris in batter y socket and cl ean if necessary . Done N Y Po we r on ? Check batter y by recharging it, moving it to another computer , or replacing it. Po we r on ? Done Y Replace power supply (if applicable). N Po we r on ? Done Y N Go to âFlowchart 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â
2â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T roubleshooting Flo wc h art 2.4âN o P ow er , P ar t 3 Continued from âFlowchart 2.3âNo P ower , Pa r t 2 . â Reseat AC adapter in computer and at po wer sou rc e. Internal or external AC adapter? Done Done Done Done Po we r on ? Po we r on ? Po we r on ? Plug directly into AC outlet. Po we r LE D on? Po we r ou tl e t active? T r y different outlet. Replace external AC adapter . Replace power cord. Y N Y Y Y Y N N N N External Internal Go to âFlowchar t 2.5âNo P ower , Pa r t 4 . â
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â13 Flowc h ar t 2.5 âN o P ow e r , P ar t 4 Y N Continued from âFlowchar t 2.4âNo P ower , Pa r t 3 . â Reseat loose components and boards and replace damaged items. Open computer . Loose or damaged parts? Y Close computer and retest. Po we r on ? Done N Replace the following items (if applicable). Check computer operation after each replacement: 1. Internal DC-DC converter* 2. Internal AC adapter 3. Processor board* 4. System board* *NOTE: Replace these items as a set to prevent shorting out among components.
2â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T roubleshooting Flo wc h art 2.6âN o Video, P ar t 1 A N Stand-alone or docking device? No video. Replace the following one at a time . T est after each replacement. 1. Cable between computer and co mputer display (if applicable) 2. Display 3. System board Internal or external display*? Adjust brightness. Video OK? Done Docking device Internal Stand-alone External Adjust brightness. Video OK? Done Y Press lid swi tc h to en su re operation. Video OK? Done Y N Video OK? Done Done N Check for bent pins on cable. Tr y another display . Internal and external video OK? Replace system board. YY N N *NOTE: T o change from internal to external display , use the hotkey . Y Go to âFlowchar t 2.7âNo Video , Pa r t 2 . â
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â15 Flo wc h art 2.7âN o Video, P ar t 2 Y N Continued from âFlowchart 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â Done Adjust external monitor display . Video OK? Adjust display brightness. Video OK? Video OK? Done Done Check that computer is properly seated in docking device, for bent pins on cable, and for monitor connection. Go to âA â in âFlowchart 2.6âNo Video , Pa r t 1 . â Check brightness of external monitor . T r y another external monitor . Internal and external video OK? Go to âFlowchar t 2.8âNonfunctioning Docking De vice (if applicable). â Y Y Y N N N Remove computer from docking device, if connected.
2â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T roubleshooting F l o wch a rt 2 .8 â N on fu nct i o n in g D o ck i ng De v i c e (i f appl icable) Y N Reseat power cord in docking device and power outlet. N Check voltage setting on docking device. Reset monitor cable connector at docking device. Reinstall computer into docking device. Docking device operating? Docking device operating? Done Done Y Nonfunctioning docking device. Remove computer , replace docking device. T est replacement docking device with new computer .
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â17 Flo wc h art 2.9âN o Opera ting S y stem (OS) Loadin g No OS loading from hard drive, go to âFlowchart 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 1. â Reseat power cord in docking device and power outlet. No OS loading.* *NOTE: Before beginning troubleshooting, always check cable connections, cable ends, and drives for bent or damaged pins. No OS loading from diskette drive, go to âFlowchart 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â No OS loading from optical drive, go to âFlowchar t 2.14âNo OS Loading, Optical Drive . â No OS loading from network, go to âFlowchar t 2.20âNo Network/Modem Connection. â
2â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T roubleshooting Flo wc h ar t 2. 1 0âNo OS Load ing , Hard Driv e, Pa r t 1 Go to âFlowchart 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Y Done N OS not loading from hard drive. Nonsystem disk message? Go to âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 2. â Reseat external hard drive. OS loading? Done Boot from CD? Go to âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â Boot from hard drive? Boot from diskette? Change boot priority through the setup utility and reboot. Boot from hard drive? Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Check the setup utility for correct booting order .
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â19 Flowc h ar t 2. 1 1âN o OS L oa di n g , H ard D riv e, Pa r t 2 Load OS using Operating System disc (if applicable). Continued from âFlowchar t 2.10âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 1. â Reseat hard drive. Done Disc or diskette in drive? 1. Replace hard drive. 2. Replace system board. Go to âFlowchar t 2.13âNo OS Loading, Diskette Driv e. â Format hard drive and bring to ab o o t a b l e C:\ prompt. Create partition, and then format hard drive to bootable C:\ prompt. Boot from diskette drive? Remove disc or diskette and reboot. Y N Boot from hard drive? Y N Y N Hard drive accessible? Y N Hard drive accessible? Done Run FDISK. Y N Hard drive partitioned? Hard drive formatted? Y N Y N Computer booted? Done Y N Go to âFlowchart 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 3. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.12âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive , P ar t 3. â
2â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T roubleshooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 2âNo OS Loadin g, Hard Driv e, Pa r t 3 Y System files on hard drive? Continued from âFlowchar t 2.11âNo OS Loading, Hard Drive, P ar t 2. â Clean virus. Done N Install OS and reboot. Virus on hard drive? OS loading from hard drive? Y N Y N Y N Diagnostics on disc or diskette? Replace hard drive. Run diagnostics and follow recommendations. Run SCANDISK and check for bad sectors. Can bad sectors be fixed? Replace hard drive. Y N Y N Fix ba d sectors. Boot from hard drive? Replace hard drive. Done
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â21 Flo wc h art 2. 1 3âNo OS Loadin g , Disk et te Driv e Replace the following components individually , retesting after each replacement: â Diskette drive â System board Done Y N Reseat diskette drive. OS not loading from diskette drive. Done Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N OS loading? Nonsystem disk message? Bootable diskette in drive? Install bootable diskette and reboot computer . Check diskette for system files. Tr y d i f f e r e n t diskette. Nonsystem disk error? OS loading? Boot from another device? Enable drive and cold boot computer . Is diskette drive boot order correct? Change boot priority using the setup utility . Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunc- tioning De vice. â Diskette drive enabled in the Setup utility? Go to âFlowchart 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Reset the computer . Refer to Section 1.2, âResetting the Computer , â for instructions.
2â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide T roubleshooting Flo wc h ar t 2. 1 4âN o OS Loadin g, O pti cal Driv e Y Done N Bootable disc in drive? Disc in drive? No OS loading from CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive. Install bootable disc and reboot computer . Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â Install bootable disc. Boots from CD or DVD? Boots from CD or DVD? T r y another bootable disc. Booting from another device? Booting order correct? Correct boot order using the setup utility . Done Reseat drive. Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Reset the computer . Refer to Section 1.2, âResetting the Computer , â for instructions.
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â2 3 Flo wc h ar t 2. 1 5 âNo Audio, P art 1 No audio. N Computer in docking device (if applicable)? Internal audio? Audio? Done Undock Audio? Done T urn up audio internally or externally . Go to âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , Pa r t 2 . â Go to âFlowchar t 2.17âNonfunctioning De vice. â T est replacement docking device with new computer . Y Y Y Y N N N Go to âFlowchar t 2.16âNo A udio , Pa r t 2 . â
2â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide T roubleshooting Flo wc h ar t 2. 1 6âNo Au dio, P ar t 2 YN Continued from âFlowchart 2.15âNo A udio , Pa r t 1 . â Reload audio drivers. Audio driver in OS configured? Audio? Y Y Y N N N Correct drivers for application? Connect to external speaker . Load drivers and set configuration in OS. Audio? Done Replace audio board and speaker connections in computer (if applicable). Replace the following components individually , retesting after each replacement: â Internal speakers. â Audio board (if applicable).
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â2 5 Flo wc h art 2. 1 7âN onfunc tioning D e vice Done Any physical device detected? Y N Unplug the nonfunctioning device from the computer and inspect cables and plugs for bent or broken pins or other damage. Reseat device. Clear CMOS. Done Fix o r replace broken item. Nonfunctioning device. Reattach device. Close computer , plug in power , and reboot. Device boots properly? Go to âFlowchart 2.9âNo Operating System (OS) Loading. â Device boots properly? Replace hard drive. Replace diskette drive. Replace NIC. If integrated NIC, replace system board. Y N Y N
2â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide T roubleshooting Flo wc h art 2. 1 8âNonfunc tionin g K e yboard Y N Keyboard operating properly? Keyboard not operating properly . External device works? Replace system board. Replace system board. Connect computer to good external keyboard. Reseat internal keyboard connector (if applicable). Replace internal keyboard or cable. Y N Y N Done Done Keyboard operating properly?
T roubleshooting Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 2â2 7 Flo wc h art 2. 1 9âNonfunc tioning P oin ting De vic e Y N Pointing device not operating properly . External device works? Replace system board. Replace system board. Connect computer to good external pointing device. Reseat internal pointing device connector (if applicable). Replace internal pointing device or cable. Y N Y N Done Done Poi n ti ng d ev i ce operating properly? Poi n ti ng d ev i ce operating properly?
2â2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide T roubleshooting Flo wc h art 2.20âNo Net w or k/Modem Conn ectio n Y Disconnect all power from the computer and open. No network or modem connection. N Done Digital line? Network or modem jack active? Replace jack or have jack activated. Connect to nondigital line. NIC/modem configured in OS? Reload drivers and reconfigure. Reseat NIC/modem (if applicable). Replace NIC/modem (if applicable). Replace system board. Done N N N N Y Y Y Y Network or modem connection working? Network or modem connection working?
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â1 3 I llus trated P ar ts C a talog This chapter provides an illustrated parts breakdo wn and a reference for spare part numbers. 3. 1 S erial N umber Location When ordering parts or requesting information, provide the computer serial number and model number located on the bottom of the computer . Ser ial Numb er L ocation
3â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P ar ts Catalog 3.2 Comp uter M ajor Com ponen ts Com put er Ma jor Com po ne nt s
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â3 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components Item Description Spare P art Number 1 Displa y assemblies (include displa y cab le, wireless antenna boards , and antenna cables) 17-inch, WXGA Dual Lamp 17-inch, WSXGA with BrightView 17-inch, WXGA with BrightView 408486-001 403797-001 403796-001 â Refer to Section 3.3, âDispla y Assemb ly Subcomponents, â for display assembly internal co mponent spare part number information. 2 Switch co ver (includes LED board and LED board cab le) 403817-001 3 K eyboar d assembl y frame 403818-001 4 LED boar d (includes LED board cable) 408494-001 5 K eyboar ds Belgium Europe Fr a n c e F rench Canada Ger many Greece Israel Italy Ko r e a Latin America The Netherlands Norwa y 403809-A41 403809-021 403809-051 403809-121 403809-041 403809-151 403809-BB1 403809-061 403809-AD1 403809-161 403809-331 403809-091 P or tugal Saudi Arabia Spain Sweden and Finland Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 403809-131 403809-171 403809-071 403809-B71 403809-111 403809-141 403809-031 403809-001 6 T op co ver (includes T ouchP ad) 403822-001
3â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P ar ts Catalog Com put er Major C om ponents
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â5 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 7 Bracket Kit , includes: Displa y hinge suppor t brack et Not illustrated: Optical drive brac ket (also included with optical drive spare par t kits) Hard drive brac ket (also included with hard drive spare par t kits) Expansion por t 2 brack et T ouchP ad brack et (also included with top cov er spare par t kits) 403816-001 8 Speaker assembl y 403825-001 9 Expansion port 2 bracket 407863-001 10 System board 407758-001 11 Optical drives D VD±RW and CD-R W Double La yer Combo Drive with LightScribe D VD±RW and CD-R W Double La yer Combo Drive D VD/CD-RW Combo Driv e 403807-001 403806-001 403805-001 12 Fa n/heat sink assembly (includes thermal paste) 407862-001 13 USB board (includes USB board and USB board cable) 408491-001 14 Optical drive connector board 408491-001 15 Processor s (include ther mal paste) Intel P entium M 21.7-GHZ Intel P entium M 2.0-GHz Intel P entium M 1.83-GHz Intel P entium M 66-GHz Dual Code 407763-001 407662-001 407661-001 407660-001
3â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P ar ts Catalog Com put er Major C om ponents
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â7 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 16 ExpressCar d assembl y 403828-001 Plastics Kit 415692-001 17a 17b 17c 17d Includes: ExpressCard slot bezel PC Card slot bezel Hard drive co v er (includes 3 captive scre w s) Memor y/Mini Card module co mpar tment cov er (includes 2c a p t i v es c r e w s ) Computer f eet (not illustrated) 18 R TC battery 403819-001 19 Bluetooth® module (includes Bluetooth module cab le) 397922-001 20 PC Car d assembl y 403835-001 21 Base enc losure 403824-001 22 Har d drives (include fr ame and connector) 7200 r pm, 100-GB 410197-001 5400 r pm, 120-GB 5400 r pm, 100-GB 5400 r pm, 80-GB 410198-001 407770-001 407847-001 23 8-cell, 4.4-hour battery pack 403808-001
3â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P ar ts Catalog Com put er Major C om ponents
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â9 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 24 Mini Car d modules 802.11a/b/g WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countries are categor ized as most of the world (MO W) 1. 407576-001 Antigua and Barbuda Argentina A ustralia Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Republic Guam Guatemala Hong K ong Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico Ne w Zealand Pa r a g u a y Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam 802.11a/b/g WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countries are categor ized as MO W 2. 407576-002 Aruba A ustria Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan
3â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P ar ts Catalog Com put er Major C om ponents
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â11 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P arts: Computer Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 24 Mini Car d modules (continued) 802.11a/b/g WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countries are categor ized as the rest of the world (RO W). 407576-003 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K o rea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11b/g WLAN module f or use in the f ollowing countries: 409250-004 Jordan Israel Ku w a i t Thailand United Arab Emirates Ukraine 25 Memory modules (1 DIMM) PC2-5300 1024 MB 512 MB 409060-001 409059-001 PC2-4200 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 407767-001 407766-001 403573-001
3â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P ar ts Catalog 3. 3 Dis p lay Assembly Subcompon ents
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â13 T able 3-2 Displa y Assembl y Subcomponent Spare P art Number Information Item Description Spare P art Number 1a 1b Display Plastics Kit F or use with Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies F or use with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemblies Includes: â Displa y bezel â Displa y enclosure â Displa y release latch actuator and hooks (not illustrated) 412269-001 403881-001 2 Display Hinge Kit F or use with Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies F or use with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemblies 412270-001 403884-001 3 Display in ver ter boar ds: F or use with Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies F or use with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemblies 412268-001 403831-001 4 Display P anel Kit (includes display panel cab le) F or use with Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies F or use with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemblies 412271-001 403885-001 5 Wireless Antenna Kit (includes cable and transceiv ers) 403882-001 Display Label Kit (not illustrated) 403887-001 Display Scre w Kit (not illustr ated), includes: â Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 scre ws â Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 scre ws â Rubber scre w cov ers 403886-001
3â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P ar ts Catalog 3.4 P l as tic s Kit T able 3-3 Plastics Kit Spare P art Number Information Item Description Spare P art Number Plastics Kit , includes: 415692-001 1 Memor y module/Mini Card module compar tment cov er (includes 2 captiv e screws , secured b y C-clips) 2 Hard drive co v er (includes 3 capt iv e screws , secured b y C-clips) 3 Computer f eet (6) 4 ExpressCard slot bezel 5 PC Card slot bezel
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â15 3.5 Ca bl e Kit Ta b l e 3 - 4 Cable Kit Spare P art Number Information Item Description Spare P art Number Cable Kit , includes: 403814-001 1 T ouchP ad cab le 2 Modem cable 3 Bluetooth module cable 4 USB board cable 5 P o wer connector cab le
3â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P ar ts Catalog 3.6 M a s s St or a g e De vi ce s
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â17 Ta b l e 3 - 5 Mass Storage Devices Spare P art Number Information Item Description Spare P art Number 1 Har d drives (include frame and connector) 7200 r pm, 100-GB 410 197-001 5400 r pm, 120-GB 5400 r pm, 100-GB 5400 r pm, 80-GB 410198-001 407770-001 407847-001 2 Optical drives D VD±RW and CD-R W Double La y er Combo Drive with LightScribe D VD±RW and CD-R W Double La y er Combo Drive D VD/CD-RW Combo Driv e 403807-001 403806-001 403805-001 USB digital drive (not illustrated) 364727-001
3â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P ar ts Catalog 3.7 Miscell an eous (Not I llus trated) Ta b l e 3 - 6 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) Spare P art Information Description Spare P art Number Composite S-Video and audio cable 407939-001 D VB-T TV tuner 412475-001 D VB-T TV tuner antenna and adapter 412176-001 HP Mobile Remote Contr ol 407313-001 Remote TV tuner 407941-001 and 408479 RF cable 408485-001 RF input adapter 407940-001 USB infrared receiver 408483-001 Screw Kit (includes the f ollowing screws; ref er to Appendix C , âScrew Listing, â f or more inf ormation on specifications and usage) 403813-001 â Phillips PM3.0Ã4.0 screw â Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 scre w â Phillips PM2.5Ã9.0 screw â Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 screw â Black Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre w â Silv er Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 screw â Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 screw â Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 screw â Slotted M1.5Ã9.0 screw USB travel mouse 375269-001 USB digital drive 364727-001 Wired headset with v olume contr ol 371693-001
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â19 P ower supplies: 90-watt, PFC 408847-001 90-watt, non-PFC 408488-011 Po w e r c o r d s Fo r u s e i n : A ustralia 403811-011 Canada, F rench Canada, and the United States 403811-001 Denmark 403811-081 F rance, Germany , and Spain 403811-021 Israel 403811-BB1 Italy 403811-061 K o rea 403811-AD1 Switzerland 403811-111 The United Kingdom 403811-031 Ta b l e 3 - 6 Miscellaneous (Not Illustrated) Spare P art Information (Continued) Description Spare P art Number
3â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustrated P ar ts Catalog 3.8 Sequ enti al P ar t Number Lis tin g Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P art Number Listing Spare P art Number Description 364727-001 USB digital dr iv e 371693-001 Wired headset with volume control 375269-001 USB trav el mouse 397922-001 Bluetooth wireless module (includes Bluetooth module cable) 403573-001 1 DIMM, PC-4200 256-MB memor y module 403796-001 17-inch, WXGA with Br ig htVie w displa y assemb ly (includes displa y cab le, wireless antenna boards , and antenna cab les) 403797-001 17-inch, WSXGA with Br ig htVie w displa y assemb ly (includes displa y cab le, wireless antenna boards , and antenna cab les) 403805-001 D VD/CD-R W Combo Drive 403806-001 D VD±R W and CD-R W Doub le La yer Combo Driv e 403807-001 D VD±R W and CD-R W Doub le La yer Combo Driv e with LightScribe 403808-001 8-cell, 4.4-hour batter y pack 403809-001 K e yboard f or us e in the United States 403809-021 K eyboard f or use inter nationally 403809-031 K e yboard f or use in the United Kingdom 403809-041 K eyboard f or use in F rance 403809-051 K eyboard f o r use in Ger many 403809-061 K e yboard f or use in Italy 403809-071 K eyboard f or use in Spain 403809-081 K eyboard f or use in Denmar k
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â21 403809-091 K eyboard f or use in Norwa y 403809-111 K eyboard f or use in Switzerland 403809-121 K eyboard f or use in F rench Canada 403809-131 K eyboard f o r use in P or tugal 403809-141 K e yboard f or use in T urke y 403809-151 K eyboard f or use in Greece 403809-161 K eyboard f or use in Latin Amer ica 403809-171 K eyboard f or use in Saudi Arabia 403809-331 K e yboard f or us e in the Netherlands 403809-A41 K eyboard f o r use in Belgium 403809-AD1 K eyboard f or use in K orea 403809-B71 K eyboard f or use in Sweden and Finland 403809-BB1 K eyboard f or use in Israel 403811-001 P ower cord f or use in the United States 403811-011 P ower cord f or use in A ustralia 403811-021 P ower cord f or use Inter nationally 403811-031 P ower cord f or use in the United Kingdom 403811-061 P ower cord f or use in Italy 403811-081 P ower cord f or use in Denmark 403811-111 P ower cord f or use in Switz erl and 403811-AD1 P ower cord f or use in K orea 403811-BB1 P ower cord f or use in Israel Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Illustrated P ar ts Catalog 403813-001 Screw Kit 403814-001 Cable Kit 403815-001 P ad Kit 403816-001 Brack et Kit 403817-001 Switch cov er (include s LED board and LED board cable) 403818-001 K eyboard assemb ly frame 403819-001 RTC battery 403822-001 T op cov er (includes T ouchP ad) 403824-001 Base enclosure 403825-001 Speaker assemb ly 403828-001 ExpressCard assembly 403831-001 Display in v er ter board fo r use with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies 403835-001 PC Card assembly 403881-001 Display Plastics Kit f or use with non-Dual Lamp display assemb lies 403882-001 Wireless Antenna Kit Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â2 3 403884-001 Display Hinge Kit f or us e with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies 403885-001 Display P anel Kit f or us e with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies 403886-001 Display Scre w Kit 403887-001 Display Label Kit 405936-001 90-watt PFC pow er adapter 407313-001 HP remote control 407316-001 512-MB SD Card memor y module 407576-001 802.11a/b/g WLAN Mini Card module for use in the f ollowing MO W 1 categor y countries: Antigua and Barb uda Argentina A ustralia Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Republic Guam Guatemala Hong K ong Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico New Zealand Pa r a g u a y Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Illustrated P ar ts Catalog 407576-002 802.11a/b/g WLAN Mini Card module for use in the f ollowing MO W 2 categor y countries: Aruba A ustria Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or tugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Lithuania Liechtenstein Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan 407576-003 802.11a/b/g WLAN Mini Card module for use in the f ollowing RO W categor y countr ies: China Ecuador Haiti Honduras Pa k i s t a n Pe r u Qatar South K orea Uruguay V enezuela 407758-001 System board 407760-001 Intel P entium M 66 -GHz Dual Code processor 407761-001 Intel P entium M 1.83-GHz processor Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Illustr ated P ar ts Catalog Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 3â2 5 407762-001 Intel P entium M 2.0-GHz processor 407763-001 Intel P entium M 21.7-GHZ processor 407766-001 1 DIMM, PC2-4200 512-MB memor y module 407767-001 1 DIMM, PC2-4200 1024-MB memor y module 407770-001 5400 r pm, 100-GB hard dr iv e (includes frame and connector) 407847-001 5400 r pm, 80-GB hard dr iv e (includes frame and connector) 407862-001 F an/heat sink asse mb ly (includes thermal paste) 407863-001 Expansion por t 2 brac k et 407939-001 Composite S- Video and audio cable 407940-001 RF input adapter cable 407941-001 TV tuner remote 408479-001 TV tuner remote 408483-001 USB infrared receiv er 408485-001 RF cable 408486-001 17-inch, WXGA Dual La mp display assemb ly (includes displa y cab le, wireless antenna boards , and antenna cab les) 408487-001 90-watt PFC A C adapter 408488-001 90-watt non-PFC A C adapter 408491-001 Optical dr iv e connector board 408492-001 USB board (includes USB board and USB board cable) 408494-001 LED board (includes LED board cable) 409059-001 1 DIMM, PC2-5300 512-GB memor y module 409060-001 1 DIMM, PC2-5300 1024-GB memor y module Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
3â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Illustrated P ar ts Catalog 409250-004 802.11b/g WLAN Mini Card module for use in the f ollowing countries: Jordan Israel Ku w a i t Thailand United Arab Emirates Ukraine 410197-001 7200 r pm, 100-GB hard dr iv e (includes frame and connector) 410198-001 5400 r pm, 120-GB hard dr iv e (includes frame and connector) 412175-001 D VB-T TV tuner 412176-001 D VB-T tuner antenna and adapter 412268-001 Display in v er ter board f or use with Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies 412269-001 Display Plastics Kit f or use with Dual Lamp display assemb lies 412270-001 Display Hinge Kit f or use with Dual Lamp display assemb lies 412271-001 Display P anel Kit f or use with Dual Lamp displa y assemblies 414226-001 F an assemb ly 415692-001 Plastics Kit Ta b l e 3 - 7 Sequential P art Number Listing (Continued) Spare P art Number Description
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 4â1 4 Remo v a l and Repl a cemen t Preliminaries This chapter provides essential information for proper and safe remov al and replacement service. 4. 1 T ools Required Y ou will need the follo wing tools to complete the remov al and replacement procedures: â Magnetic scre wdri ver â Phillips P0 scre wdri v er â Flat-bladed scre wdri v er â T ool kitâincludes connector remov al tool, loopback plugs, and case utility tool
4â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminari es 4.2 Ser vice C onsidera tions The follo wing sections include some of the considerations that you should keep in mind during disassembly and assembly procedures. â As you remov e each subassembly from the computer , place the subassembly (and all accompanying scre ws) away from the work area to pre v ent damage. Pl a s t i c Pa r t s Using excessi ve force during disassembly and reassembly can damage plastic parts. Use care when handling the plastic parts. Apply pressure only at the points designated in the maintenance instructions. Ca bl es and C onnec tors à CA UTION: When servic ing t he computer , ensure that cables are placed in their pr oper locations dur ing the r eas sembl y pr oces s. Impr oper ca ble placement can damage the com puter . Cables must be handled with extreme care to a void damage. Apply only the tension required to unseat or seat the cables during remov al and insertion. Handle cables by the connector whene ver possible. In all cases, a void bending, twisting, or tearing cables. Ensure that cables are routed in such a way that they cannot be caught or snagged b y parts being remo ved or replaced. Handle flex cables w ith e xtreme care; these cables tear easily .
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr eliminaries Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 4â3 4. 3 P r e v ent ing Da mage t o R emo v able D ri v es Remov able driv es are fragile components that must be handled with care. T o prev ent damage to the computer , damage to a remov able driv e, or loss of information, observ e the follo wing precautions: â Before removing or inserting a hard dri ve, shut do wn the computer . If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it do wn through the operating system. â Before removing a disk ette dri v e or optical dri ve, ensure that a diskette or disc is not in the dri ve and ensure that the optical dri ve tray is closed. â Before handling a dri ve, ensure that you are dischar ged of static electricity . While handling a dri ve, a v oid touching the connector . â Handle dri ves on surf aces co vered with at least one inch of shock-proof foam. â A v oid dropping dri v es from any height onto an y surf ace. â After removing a hard dri ve, an optical dri v e or a diskette dri ve, place it in a static-proof bag. â A v oid exposing a hard dri ve to products that ha ve magnetic f ields, such as monitors or speakers. â A v oid exposing a dri ve to temperature e xtremes or liquids. â If a dri ve must be mailed, place the dri ve in a b ubble pack mailer or other suitable form of protecti ve packaging and label the package âFRA GILE: Handle W ith Care. â
4â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminari es 4.4 Pr e v entin g Elec trosta tic D ama ge Many electronic components are sensiti ve to electrostatic dischar ge (ESD). Circuitry design and structure determine the degree of sensiti vity . Networks b uilt into man y integrated circuits provide some protection, b ut in many cases, the dischar ge contains enough po wer to alter de vice parameters or melt silicon junctions. A sudden dischar ge of static electricity from a finger or other conductor can destroy static-sensiti ve de vices or microcircuitry . Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, b ut damage occurs. An electronic de vice e xposed to electrostatic dischar ge may not be af fected at all and can work perfectly throughout a normal cycle. Or the de vice may function normally for a while, then degrade in the internal layers, reducing its life e xpectanc y .
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr eliminaries Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 4â5 4.5 P ac k agin g and T ranspor tin g Precautions Use the follo wing grounding precautions when packaging and transporting equipment: â T o av oid hand contact, transport products in static-safe containers, such as tubes, bags, or boxes. â Protect all electrostatic-sensiti ve parts and assemblies with conducti ve or appro v ed containers or packaging. â K eep electrostatic-sensiti v e parts in their containers until the parts arri ve at static-free w orkstations. â Place items on a grounded surface before remo ving items from their containers. â Alw ays be properly grounded when touching a sensiti ve component or assembly . â Store reusable electrostatic-sensiti ve parts from assemblies in protecti ve packaging or nonconducti ve foam. â Use transporters and con ve yors made of antistatic belts and roller b ushings. Ensure that mechanized equipment used for moving materials is wired to ground and that proper materials are selected to a v oid static charging. When grounding is not possible, use an ionizer to dissipate electric charges.
4â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminari es 4.6 W orkstation Precau tions Use the follo wing grounding precautions at workstations: â Cov er the workstation with appro v ed static-shielding material (refer to T able 4-2, âStatic-Shielding Materialsâ ). â Use a wrist strap connected to a properly grounded work surface and use properly grounded tools and equipment. â Use conducti v e field service tools such as cutters, scre wdri vers, and v acuums. â When f ixtures must directly contact dissipati ve surf aces, use f ixtures made only of static-safe materials. â K eep the work area free of nonconducti ve materials such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and Styrofoam. â Handle electrostatic-sensiti ve components, parts, and assemblies by the case or PCM laminate. Handle these items only at static-free workstations. â A v oid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry . â T urn off po wer and input signals before inserting or removing connectors or test equipment.
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr eliminaries Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 4â7 4.7 Groundin g E quip ment an d Methods Grounding equipment must include either a wrist strap or a foot strap at a grounded workstation. â When seated, wear a wrist strap connected to a grounded system. Wrist straps are flexible straps with a minimum of one megohm ±10% resistance in the ground cords. T o provide proper ground, wear a strap snugly against the skin at all times. On grounded mats with banana-plug connectors, use alligator clips to connect a wrist strap. â When standing, use foot straps and a grounded floor mat. Foot straps (heel, toe, or boot straps) can be used at standing workstations and are compatible with most types of shoes or boots. On conducti ve floors or dissipati ve floor mats, use foot straps on both feet with a minimum of one megohm resistance between the operator and ground. T o be effecti ve, the conducti ve strips must be w orn in contact with the skin. Other grounding equipment recommended for use in pre v enting electrostatic damage includes: â Antistatic tape â Antistatic smocks, aprons, and slee ve protectors â Conducti ve bins and other assembly or soldering aids â Nonconducti ve foam â Conducti ve tabletop w orkstations with ground cords of one megohm resistance â Static-dissipati ve tables or floor mats with hard ties to the ground â Field service kits â Static aw areness labels â Material-handling packages â Nonconducti ve plastic bags, tubes, or box es â Metal tote boxes â Electrostatic v oltage le vels and protecti ve materials
4â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminari es T able 4-1 shows ho w humidity affects the electrostatic v oltage le ve ls generated by dif ferent activities. T able 4-2 lists the shielding protection provided by antistatic bags and floor mats. Ta b l e 4 - 1 T ypical Electrostatic V olta ge Levels Relative Humidity Event 10% 40% 55% W alking across car pet 35,000 V 15,000 V 7,500 V W a lking across vin yl floor 12,000 V 5,000 V 3,000 V Motions of bench worker 6,000 V 800 V 400 V Removing DIPS from plastic tube 2,000 V 700 V 400 V Removing DIPS from vin yl tra y 11,500 V 4,000 V 2,000 V Removing DIPS from Styrof oam 14,500 V 5,000 V 3,500 V Removing b ubb le pac k from PCB 26,500 V 20,000 V 7 ,000 V P a c king PCBs in f oam-lined bo x 21,000 V 11,000 V 5,000 V â A product can be degraded by as little as 700 V. Ta b l e 4 - 2 Static-Shielding Materials Material Use V oltage Pr otection Level Antistatic plastic Bags 1,500 V Carbon-loaded plastic F loor mats 7,500 V Metallized laminate Floor mats 5,000 V
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â1 5 Remo v a l and Repl a cemen t Pr ocedure s This chapter provides remo v a l and replacement procedures. There are as many as 109 scre ws , in 10 different sizes, that may ha ve to be remo v ed, replaced, or loosened when servicing the computer . Make special note of each scre w size and location during remov al and replacement. Refer to Appendix C, âScre w Listing, â for detailed information on scre w and nut sizes, locations, and usage.
5â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5 . 1 Seri al N umber Report the computer serial number to HP when requesting information or ordering spare parts. The serial number is located on the bottom of the computer . Ser ial Numb er L ocation
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â3 5 .2 Disassem bl y Seque nce Chart Use the chart belo w to determine the section number to be referenced when removing computer components. Disassembl y Sequence Chart Section Description # of Screws Remo ved 5.3 Preparing the Computer for Disassemb ly Batter y pack 0 5.4 Hard Drive 3 loosened to remov e the hard drive co ver 4 to remov e the hard dr ives 8 to remov e the hard dr ive frames 5.5 Computer F eet 0 5.6 Memor y Module 2 loosened to remov e the memor y module/Mini Card module compar tment cov er 5.7 Mini Card Module 0 Ã T o pre v ent an unresponsiv e system and the displa y of a warning message, install only a Mini Card de vice authorized f or use in your computer b y the gov er nmental agency that regulates wireless de vices in yo ur countr y . If you install a de vice and then receive a w arning message, remov e the de vice to restore computer functionality . Then contact Customer Care. 5.8 RT C B a t t e r y 0 5.9 Optical Drive 1 to remov e the optical dr ive 2 to remov e the optical dr ive brac k et 5.10 Switch Cov er 5 5.11 K eyboard Assemb ly 2
5â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5 .3 Preparing t h e Com pu ter f or Di sassem bl y Before you begin an y remo v al or installation procedures: 1. Shut do wn the computer . If you are unsure whether the computer is of f or in hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it do wn through the operating system. 2. Disconnect all external de vices connected to the computer . 3. Disconnect the po wer cord. 5.12 LED Board 4 5.13 Key b o a r d 5 5.14 Displa y Assemb ly 6 to remo ve the displa y assembly 6 to remov e the display bez el 4 to remov e the display panel 4 to remov e each display hinge 1 to remov e the display inv e r ter 5.15 To p C o v e r 24 5.16 System Board 8 5.17 Bluetooth Module 2 5.18 Modem Cab le 0 5.19 USB Board 0 5.20 Speaker Assemb ly 2 5.21 F an/Heat Sink Assembly 9 5.22 Processor 1 loosened 5.23 PC Card Assembly 2 Disassembl y Sequence Char t (Continued)
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â5 4. Remov e the battery pack b y follo wing these steps: a. T urn the computer upside do wn with the front to ward you. b . Slide the battery pack release latch 1 to the left. (The battery pack disengages from the computer .) c. Lift the front edge of the battery pack 3 up and swing it back to remov e it. R emo v ing the Battery P ack Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the battery pack. Battery P ack Spare P ar t Number Information 8-cell, 4.4-hour batter y pack 403808-001
5â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5 .4 H ard Dri v e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3 ). 2. Loosen the three black Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre ws 1 that secure the hard dri ve co v er to the computer . 3. Lift the rear edge of the hard dri v e cov er 2 and swing it up and forward and remo ve it. â The hard dri ve co v er is included in the Miscellaneous Plastics Kit, spare part number 415692-001. R emo v ing the Har d Dr i v e Co ver Har d Drive Spare P art Number Information Hard drives (include fr ame and connector) 7200 r pm, 100-GB 410197-001 5400 r pm, 120-GB 5400 r pm, 100-GB 5400 r pm, 80-GB 410198-001 407770-001 407847-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â7 4. Remov e the two silv er Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 hard dri ve retention scre ws 1 that secure the hard dri ves to the computer . 5. Slide the hard dri v e 2 aw ay from the hard dri ve connector . 6. Remov e the hard dri ve from the hard dri v e bay 3 . R emo v ing the Har d Dr i v e
5â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 7. Remov e the four Phillips PM3.0Ã4.0 hard dri v e frame scre ws 1 that secure the hard dri v e frame to the hard dri v e. 8. Lift the hard dri ve straight up 2 to remo v e if from the hard dri v e frame. R emo v ing the Har d Dr i v e F r ame Re v erse the abov e procedure to reassemble and install the hard dri ve.
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â9 5. 5 C o m p u t e r Fe e t The computer feet are adhesi v e-backed rubber pads. The feet are included in the Miscellaneous Plastics Kit, spare part number 415692-001. Re p la ci n g th e C om p ut e r Fee t
5â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5. 6 M e m o r y M o d u l e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the rear panel to ward you. Memory Module Spare P ar t Number Inf ormation Memor y modules (1 DIMM) PC2-5300 1024 MB 512 MB 409060-001 409059-001 PC2-4200 1024 MB 512 MB 256 MB 407767-001 407766-001 403573-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â11 3. Loosen the two black Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre ws 1 that secure the memory module/Mini Card module compartment cov er to the computer . 4. Lift the right side of the cov er 2 and swing it up and to the left and remov e it. â The memory module/Mini Card module compartment cov er is included in the Miscellaneous Plastics Kit, spare part number 415692-001. R emo v ing the Memory Module/Mini Car d Module Com partment Cover
5â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5. Spread the retaining tabs 1 on each side of the memory module socket to release the memory module. (The edge of the module opposite the socket rises a way from the computer .) 6. Slide the module aw ay from the socket at an angle 2 . 7. Remov e the memory module board. â Memory modules are designed with notches 3 to pre vent incorrect installation into the memory module socket. R emo v ing the Memory Module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a memory module.
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â13 5 .7 M ini C ard Module Mini Car d Module Spare P art Number Information 802.11a/b/g WLAN module f or use in the MO W 1 categor y countries listed below: 407576-001 Antigua and Barbuda Argentina Au s t ra l i a Bahamas Barbados Brunei Canada Chile Dominican Repub lic Guam Guatemala Hong K ong Pa n a m a India Indonesia Mala ysia Me xico Ne w Zealand Pa r a g u a y Saudi Arabia Ta i w a n The United States Vietnam 802.11a/b/g WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countries are categor ized as MO W 2. 407576-002 Aruba Au s t r i a Azerbaijan Bahrain Belgium Ber muda Bulgaria Ca yman Islands Columbia Croatia Cyprus Czech Repub lic Denmark Eg ypt El Salv ador Estonia Finland Fr a n c e Georgia Ger many Greece Hungar y Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia Lebanon The Philippines Po l a n d P or t ugal Romania Russia Serbia and Montenegro Singapore Slov akia Liechtenstein Lithuania Lux embourg Malta Monaco The Netherlands Norwa y Oman Slov enia South Africa Spain Sri Lanka Sweden Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom Uzbekistan
5â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the memory module/Mini Card module compartment cov er ( Section 5.6 ). 802.11a/b/g WLAN module f or use in the countries listed below . These countries are categor ized as the rest of the w orld (RO W). 407576-003 China Ecuador Haiti Honduras P akistan Pe r u Qatar South K o rea Uruguay V enezuela 802.11b/g WLAN module f or use in the f ollowing countries: 409250-004 Jordan Israel Ku w a i t Thailand United Arab Emirates Ukraine Mini Car d Module Spare P art Number Information (Continued)
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â15 3. Before disconnecting the antenna cables, make note of which cable is attached to which antenna clip on the Mini Card module, and then disconnect the auxiliary and main 1 antenna cables from the Mini Card module. 4. Slide the Mini Card retainer bar 2 aw ay from the Mini Card module. (The edge of the module opposite the socket rises aw ay from the computer .) 5. Remov e the Mini Card module b y pulling the card a way from the socket at an angle 3 . â The Mini Card module is designed with a notch 4 to pre vent incorrect installation. R emo v ing a Mini C ar d module Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a Mini Card module.
5â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5. 8 R TC B a t t e r y 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the memory module/Mini Card module compartment cov er ( Section 5.6 ). 3. Remov e the Mini Card module ( Section 5.7 ). 4. Remov e the R TC battery from the socket on the system board. R emo v ing the R T C Bat tery Re v erse the abov e procedure to install an R TC battery . R TC Battery Spare Part Number Information R TC batter y 403819-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â17 5 .9 O ptical Driv e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Position the computer with the left side to ward you. Optical Drive Spare P art Number Information D VD±RW and CD-R W Double La y er Combo Drive with LightScribe D VD±RW and CD-R W Double La y er Combo Drive D VD/CD-RW Combo Driv e 403807-001 403806-001 403805-001
5â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 3. Remov e the Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 scre w 1 that secures the optical dri ve to the computer . 4. Insert a thin tool, such as an unbent paper clip 2 , into the media tray release hole and release the media tray . 5. Use the media tray to slide the optical dri v e 3 out of the computer . 6. Remov e the optical dri ve. R emo v ing the Optical Dr iv e
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â19 7. If it is necessary to replace the optical dri ve brack et, remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre ws 1 that secure the bracket to the optical dri v e. 8. Remov e the optical dri ve bracket 1 . R emo v ing the Optical Dr iv e Br ac k et Re v erse the abov e procedure to install an optical dri v e.
5â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5. 1 0 Sw i t c h C ove r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 scre ws 1 and the three Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 scre ws 2 that secure the switch cov er to the computer . R emo v ing the S wit c h Co ver Sc r ew s Switch Co ver Spare P ar t Number Information Switch cov er (includes LED board and LED board cab le) 403817-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â21 3. T urn the computer display-side up with the front to ward you. 4. Open the computer as far as possible. 5. Insert a flat-bladed scre wdri v er under the display hinge cove r 1 sections of the switch cov er . 6. Lift the switch cov er until the left and right sides 2 of the switch cov er disengage from the computer . 7. Remov e the switch co ve r . R emo v ing the S wit ch C o v er Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the switch cov er .
5â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5. 1 1 K eyb o a r d A s s e m b l y 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the memory module/Mini Card module compartment cov er ( Section 5.6 ). 3. Remov e the switch co ve r ( Section 5.10 ). 4. T urn the computer upside do wn with the rear panel to ward you. 5. Remov e the Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 scre w 1 in the memory module/Mini Card module compartment that secures the ke yboard assembly to the computer . 6. Remov e the silv er Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre w 2 in the battery bay that secures the ke yboard assembly to the computer . R emo v ing the K e yboar d Assembl y Sc r e w s Ke yboar d Assemb ly Spare P ar t Number Information K eyboard assembly fr ame 403818-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â2 3 7. T urn the computer display-side up with front to ward you. 8. Open the computer as far as possible. 9. Lift and hold the rear edge of the ke yboard until the LED board cable connector is accessible. R eleasing the K ey boar d Ass embl y
5â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 10. Release the zero insertion force (ZIF) connector 1 to which the LED board cable is connected and disconnect the cable 2 . R eleasing the K ey boar d Ass embl y
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â2 5 11. Swing the ke yboard assembly 1 forward until the assembly rests on the palm rest. 12. Release the ZIF connector to which the ke yboard cable 2 is attached and disconnect the ke yboard cable 3 . 13. Remov e the ke yboard assembly . R emo v ing the K e yboar d Assembl y Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the ke yboard assembly .
5â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5 . 1 2 LED B oard 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and then remov e the follo wing components: a. Memory module/Mini Card module compartment cov er ( Section 5.6) b . Switch co ver ( Section 5.10 ) c. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) 2. T urn the ke yboard assembly upside do wn with the LED board to ward you. LED Boar d Spare P art Number Information LED board (includes LED board cable 408494-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â2 7 3. Remov e the four Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 scre ws 1 that secure the LED board to the ke yboard frame. 4. Remov e the LED board 2 . R emo v ing the LED Boar d Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the LED board.
5â2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5. 1 3 K eyb o a r d 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and then remov e the follo wing components: a. Memory module/Mini Card module compartment cov er ( Section 5.6) b . Switch co ver ( Section 5.10 ) c. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) 2. T urn the ke yboard assembly upside do wn with the LED board to ward you. Ke yboar d Spare P ar t Number Information Belgium Europe F rance F rench Canada Ger many Greece Israel Italy Ko r e a Latin America 403809-A41 403809-021 403809-051 403809-121 403809-041 403809-151 403809-BB1 403809-061 403809-AD1 403809-161 The Netherlands Norwa y P or t ugal Saudi Arabia Spain Sweden and Finland Switzerland Tu r k e y The United Kingdom The United States 403809-331 403809-091 403809-131 403809-171 403809-071 403809-B71 403809-111 403809-141 403809-031 403809-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5 â2 9 3. Remov e the f i v e Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 scre ws 1 that secure the ke yboard to the ke yboard frame. 4. Remov e the ke yboard 2 . R emo v ing the K ey board Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the ke yboard.
5â30 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5 . 1 4 Di spla y Assemb l y 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ). 2. Remov e the memory module/Mini Card module compartment cov er ( Section 5.6 ). 3. Disconnect the wireless ante nna cables from the Mini Card module ( Section 5.7 ). Displa y Assembl y Spare P a rt Number Information Displa y assemb lies (include displa y cable , wireless antenna boards , and antenna cab les) 17-inch, WXGA Dual Lamp 17-inch, WSXGA with BrightView 17-inch, WXGA with BrightView 408486-001 403797-001 403796-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â31 4. Remov e the switch co ve r ( Section 5.10 ). 5. Remov e the ke yboard assembly ( Section 5.11 ). 6. Disconnect the display cable 1 from the system board. 7. Remov e the wireless antenna cables from the clips 2 in the top cov er . Disconnecting the Dis pla y and Wir eless Ant enna Cable s
5â3 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s à CA UTION: Support the display a ssembl y w hen r emo v ing the fo llo w ing sc r e ws . F ailure to su pport the display as sembl y can r esult in damage to the displa y asse mbly and other com puter components . 8. Remov e the the silv er Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre w 1 and the f i ve Phillips PM2.5Ã9.0 scre ws 2 that secure the display assembly to the computer . 9. Lift the display assembly straight up and remov e it 3 . R emo v ing the Displa y Assembl y
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â3 3 Displa y Assembl y Subcomponent Spare P art Number Information Description Spare P art Number Display Plastics Kit F or use with Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies F or use with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies Includes: â Displa y bezel â Displa y enclosure â Displa y release latch actuator and hooks (not illustrated) 412269-001 403881-001 Display Hinge Kit F or use with Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies F or use with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies 412270-001 403884-001 Display in ver ter boar ds: F or use with Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies F or use with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies 412268-001 403831-001 Display P anel Kit (includes display panel cab le) F or use with Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies F or use with non-Dual Lamp displa y assemb lies 412271-001 403885-001 Wireless Antenna Kit (includes cable and tr ansceiv ers) 403882-001 Display Label Kit (not illustr ated) 403887-001 Display Scre w Kit (not illustrated), includes: â Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 screws â Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 scre ws â Rubber scre w cov ers 403886-001
5â34 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 10. Remov e the six rubber scre w cove rs 1 and 2 and the six Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 scre ws 3 that secure the display bezel to the display assembly . â The four rubber scre w co vers 1 on the top edge of the display bezel are larger than the tw o rubber scre w co vers 2 on the bottom edge of the bezel. R emo v ing the Displa y Bez el Scr ew s
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5 â3 5 11. Flex the inside edges of the left and right sides 1 and the top and bottom sides 2 of the display bezel until the bezel disengages from the display assembly . 12. Remov e the display bezel 3 . R emo v ing the Displa y Bez el
5â3 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 13. Disconnect the follo wing cables: 1 Display panel cable 2 Light sensor cable 3 Display in verter cable Disconnecting the Dis pla y P anel Cables 14. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 scre ws 1 and the two Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 scre ws 2 that secure the display panel to the display enclosure. 15. Remov e the display panel 3 . R emo v ing the Displa y P anel
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â3 7 16. Remov e the four Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre ws 1 that secure each display hinge to the display panel. 17. Remov e the display hinges 2 . R emo v ing the Displa y Hinges
5â3 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 18. Remov e the Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre w 1 that secures the display in verter to the display enclosure. 19. Swing the top edge of the in verter 2 up and forward and remov e the in verter . R emo v ing the Displa y In ve rter
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â3 9 20. Release the retention tabs 1 b uilt in to the display enclosure lining that secure the wireless antenna cables to the display enclosure. 21. Detach the wireless antenna transcei v ers 2 from the display enclosure. 22. Remov e the wireless antenna transcei vers and cables 3 . R emo v ing the W ir eles s Antenna T r ansce i v ers and C ables Re v erse the abov e procedure to reassemble and install the display assembly .
5â40 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5. 1 5 T o p C ove r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ) and then remov e the follo wing components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory module/Mini Card module compartment co ver ( Section 5.6) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. Switch cov er ( Section 5.10 ) e. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.14 ) To p C o v e r Spare P art Number Information T op cov er (includes T ouchP ad) 403822-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â41 2. Release the ZIF connector to which the T ouchPad cable 1 is connected and disconnect the T ouchPad cable 2 from the system board. â The T ouchPad cable is included in the Miscellaneous Cable Kit, spare part number 403814-001. Disconnecting the T ouc hP ad Cable
5â4 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 3. T urn the computer upside do wn with the front to ward you. 4. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 scre ws 1 and three silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre ws 2 that secure the top cov er to the computer . R emo v ing the T op Co v er Sc r ew s, P art 1
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â43 5. Remov e the f i v e Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 scre ws that secure the top cov er to the computer . R emo v ing the T op Co v er Sc r ew s, P art 2
5â44 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 6. T urn the computer right-side up with the front to ward you. 7. Remov e the eight silv er Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre ws that secure the top cov er to the computer . R emo v ing the T op Co v er Sc r ew s, P art 3
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â4 5 8. Remov e the six Phillips PM2.5Ã 13.0 scre ws that secure the top cov er to the computer . R emo v ing the T op Co v er Sc r ew s, P art 4
5â46 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 9. Lift up the rear edge of the top cov er 1 until it disengages from the base enclosure. 10. Lift the top cov er 2 straight up and remo ve it. R emo v ing the T op Co v er Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the top cov er .
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â4 7 5. 1 6 Sys t e m B o a r d â When replacing the system board, ensure that the follo wing components are remov ed from the defecti ve system board and installed on the replacement system board: â Memory modules ( Section 5.6 ) â Mini Card module ( Section 5.7 ) â R TC battery ( Section 5.8) â Speaker assembly ( Section 5.20 ) â Fan/heat sink assembly ( Section 5.21 ) â Processor ( Section 5.22 ) â PC Card assembly ( Section 5.23 ) 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory module/Mini Card module compartment co ver ( Section 5.6) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. Switch cov er ( Section 5.10 ) e. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.14 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.15 ) System Boar d Spare P art Number Information System board 407758-001
5â4 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 2. Press in on the ExpressCard slot bezel 1 to release it. 3. Remov e the ExpressCard slot bezel 2 . R emo v ing the Expr essC ar d Slot Bez el
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â4 9 4. Remov e the two silv er Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre ws 1 that secure the display hinge support bracket to the computer . 5. Remov e the display hinge support brack et 2 . â The display hinge support bracket is included in the Miscellaneous Bracket Kit, spare part number 403816-001. R emo v ing the Displa y Hinge Support Br ac k et
5â5 0 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 6. Remov e the follo wing screws: 1 One Phillips PM2.5Ã9.0 scre w that secures the system board to the base enclosure 2 Four silv er Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 screws that secure the system board to the base enclosure 3 One silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre w that secures the optical dri ve connector board to the base enclosure 7. Remov e the ExpressCard assembly 4 . R emo v ing the S ys tem Boar d Sc r e ws
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â51 8. Disconnect the follo wing cables from the system board: 1 modem cable 2 Bluetooth board cable 3 USB board cable Disconnec ting the USB Boar d and Modem Cables
5â5 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 9. Lift the right side of the system board 1 until the right side of the board is clear of the base enclosure. 10. Slide the system board 2 to the right at an angle and re move it 3 . R emo v ing the S yst em Boar d
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â5 3 11. Remov e the optical dri ve connector board from the system board. â The optical dri ve connector board is a vailable using spare part number 408491-001. R emo v ing the Optical Dr iv e C onnector Boar d Re v erse the abov e procedures to install the system board.
5â54 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5 . 1 7 Bluetooth Modul e 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory module/Mini Card module compartment co ver ( Section 5.6) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. Switch cov er ( Section 5.10 ) e. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.14 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.15 ) Bluetooth Module Spare P art Number Information Bluetooth module (includes Bl uetooth module cab le) 397922-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â5 5 2. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre ws 1 that secure the Bluetooth module to the base enclosure 3. Remov e the Bluetooth module from the base enclosure 2 . 4. Disconnect the Bluetooth module cable 3 from the Bluetooth module. R emo v ing the Bluetooth Module
5â5 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5. Slide and hold the battery release latch acuator 1 to the right. 6. Slide the Bluetooth module cable 2 through the hole in the battery release latch actuator . 7. Remov e the Bluetooth module cable from the base enclosure clips 3 that hold it. 8. Remov e the Bluetooth module cable 4 . â The Bluetooth module cable is included with the Bluetooth module and is also a v ailable in the Miscellaneous Cable Kit, spare part number 403814-001. R emo v ing the Bluetooth Module Ca ble Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the Bluetooth module.
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â5 7 5 . 1 8 Mode m Cable â The modem board cable is included in the Miscellaneous Cable Kit, spare part number 403814-001. 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory module/Mini Card module compartment co ver ( Section 5.6) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. Switch cov er ( Section 5.10 ) e. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.14 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.15 )
5â5 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 2. Remov e the modem connector 1 from the clip 2 in the base enclosure. 3. Remov e the modem cable from the routing channel 3 in the base enclosure. R emo v ing the Modem Ca ble Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the modem cable.
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â5 9 5. 1 9 U S B B o a r d 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory module/Mini Card module compartment co ver ( Section 5.6) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. Switch cov er ( Section 5.10 ) e. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.14 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.15 ) h. System board ( Section 5.16 ) USB Boar d Spare P art Number Information USB board (includes USB board and USB board cabl e) 408491-001
5â60 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 2. Remov e the USB board cable from the routing clips 1 in the base enclosure. 3. Remov e the USB board 2 from the base enclosure. 4. Disconnect the USB board cable 3 from the USB board. â The USB board cable is included with the USB board and is also a v ailable in the Miscella neous Cable Kit, spare part number 403814-001. R emo v ing the U SB Board Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a USB board.
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â61 5 .20 Spea k er Asse mbl y 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory module/Mini Card module compartment co ver ( Section 5.6) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. Switch cov er ( Section 5.10 ) e. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.14 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.15 ) h. System board ( Section 5.16 ) Speaker Assembl y Spare P a rt Number Information Speak er assembly 403825-001
5â6 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 2. T urn the system board upside do wn with the front to ward you. 3. Disconnect the speaker cable from the system board. Disconnecting the S peak er Cable
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â6 3 4. Remov e the two silv er Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre ws 1 that secure the speaker assembly to the system board. 5. Slide the speaker assembly 2 forward until it clears the system board. R emo v ing the Speak er Assembl y Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the speaker assembly .
5â64 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5 .2 1 F an/Hea t Sink Assembly 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory module/Mini Card module compartment co ver ( Section 5.6) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. Switch cov er ( Section 5.10 ) e. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.14 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.15 ) h. System board ( Section 5.16 ) F an/Heat Sink Assembl y Spar e P ar t Number Information F an/heat sink assembly (includes thermal paste) 407862-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5 â6 5 2. Disconnect the fan cable 1 and the po wer connector cable 2 from the system board. 3. Remov e the four silv er Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 scre ws 3 that secure the fan/heat sink assembly to the system board. R emo v ing the F an/H eat Sink Asse mbly S cr ew s , P ar t 1
5â6 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 4. Remov e the follo wing screws: 3 One Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 scre w that secures the expansion port 2 bracket and f an/heat sink assembly to the system board 4 T wo slotted M1.5Ã9.0 scre ws on each side of the expansion port 2 that secure the e xpansion port brack et and fan/heat sink assembly to the system board 5 T wo Phillips PM3.0Ã7.0 scre ws on each side of the external monitor port that secure the f an/heat sink assembly to the system board R emo v ing the F an/H eat Sink Asse mbly S cr ew s , P ar t 2
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â6 7 5. Slide the expansion port 2 brack et 1 aw ay from the system board. 6. Remov e the f an/heat sink assembly 2 . â Due to the adhesi v e quality of the thermal paste located between the fan/heat sink assembly and processor , it may be necessary to mov e the fan/heat sink assembly from side to side to detach the it from the processor . R emo v ing the F an/H eat Sink Asse mbly
5â6 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s â The thermal paste should be thoroughly cleaned from the surfaces of the processor 1 and fan/heat sink assembly 2 each time the fan/heat sink assembly is removed. Thermal paste should be reapplied to both surfaces before the fan/heat sink assembly is reinstalled. Thermal paste is included with all fan/heat sink assembly and processor spare part kits. R eplac ing the T hermal P aste
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Guide 5â6 9 â If necessary , perform the follo wing steps to remov e the po wer connector cable from the fan/heat sink assembly . The po wer connector cable is included in the Miscellaneous Cable Kit, spare part number 403814-001. 7. T urn the fan/heat sink assembly upside do wn with the po wer connector to ward you. 8. Remov e the po wer connector cable 1 from the routing channel on the fan/heat sink assembly . 9. Remov e the po wer connector 2 from the clip in the fan/heat sink assembly . R emo v ing the P o w er C onnector C able Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the fan/heat sink assembly .
5â7 0 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5. 22 P r o c e s s o r 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory module/Mini Card module compartment co ver ( Section 5.6) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. Switch cov er ( Section 5.10 ) e. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.14 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.15 ) h. System board ( Section 5.16 ) i. F an/heat sink assembly ( Section 5.21 ) Pr ocessor Spare P art Number Information Pr ocessors (include thermal paste) Intel P entium M 21.7-GHZ Intel P entium M 2.0-GHz Intel P entium M 1.83-GHz Intel P entium M 66-GHz Dual Code 407763-001 407662-001 407661-001 407660-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â71 2. Use a flat-bladed scre wdri v er to turn the slotted locking scre w 1 one-half turn counterclockwise. 3. Lift the processor straight up and remov e it 2 . â The gold triangle 3 on the processor should be aligned with the triangle 4 embossed on the processor socket when you install the processor. R emo v ing the Pr ocess or Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the processor .
5â7 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 5. 23 P C C a r d A s s e m b l y 1. Prepare the computer for disassembly ( Section 5.3 ), and then remov e the following components: a. Hard dri ve ( Section 5.4 ) b . Memory module/Mini Card module compartment co ver ( Section 5.6) c. Optical dri v e ( Section 5.9 ) d. Switch cov er ( Section 5.10 ) e. K eyboard assembly ( Section 5.11) f. Display assembly ( Section 5.14 ) g. T op cov er ( Section 5.15 ) h. System board ( Section 5.16 ) PC Car d Assembl y Spare P art Number Information PC Card assembly 403835-001
Re mov al and R eplacement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 5â7 3 2. T urn the system board upside do wn with the audio jacks, USB ports, and external monitor port to ward you. 3. Remov e the two Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 scre ws that secure the PC Card assembly to the system board. R emo v ing the P C Car d Assembl y Sc r ew s
5â7 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedure s 4. T urn the system board top-side up with the audio jacks, USB ports, and external monitor port to ward you. 5. Disengage the hooks 1 on the PC Card assembly from the detents 2 on the PC Card connector and remo v e the PC Card assembly 3 from the system board. R emo v ing the P C Car d Assembl y Re v erse the abov e procedures to install the PC Card assembly .
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â1 6 Spec ific ations This chapter provides physical and performance specif ications. Ta b l e 6 - 1 Computer Dimensions Metric U .S. Height F ront Rear Width Depth 3.76 cm 4.62 cm 39.68 cm 28.19 cm 1.48 in 1.82 in 15.62 in 11.10 in W eight With 17.0-inch displa y , optical drive and 8-cell batter y pac k 3.62 kg 7.98 lbs Input P ower Operating v oltage Operating current 18.5 V dc to 19.0 V dc 4.74 A or 4.9 A T emperature Operating Nonoperating 10°C to 35°C -20°C to 60°C 50°F to 95°F -4°F to 140°F
6â2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90% 5% to 95% 10% to 90% 5% to 95% Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia) Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia) -15 m to 3,048 m -15 m to 12,192 m -50 ft to 10,000 ft -50 ft to 40,000 ft Shock Operating Nonoperating 125 g, 2 ms, half-sine 200 g, 2 ms, half-sine Random Vibration Operating Nonoperating 0.75 g zero-to-peak, 10 Hz to 500 Hz, 0.25 oct/min s weep r ate 1.50 g zero-to-peak, 10 Hz to 500 Hz, 0.5 oct/min s weep r ate â Applicable product safety standards specify thermal limits for plastic surfaces. The computer operates well within this range of temperatures. Ta b l e 6 - 1 Computer (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â3 Ta b l e 6 - 2 17.0-inch, WSXGA , BrightVie w Displa y Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 23.00 cm 36.80 cm 43.40 cm 9.06 in 14.49 in 17.09 in Number of colors Up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 200:1 Brightness 180 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.197 à 0.197 mm 1680 à 1050 RGB v er tical str ipe Backlight Edge lit Character display 80 à 25 T otal power consumption 4 W Viewing angle /-65° horizontal, 5 0° v er tical typical
6â4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 3 17.0-inch, WXGA , BrightVie w Displa y Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 23.00 cm 36.80 cm 43.40 cm 9.06 in 14.49 in 17.09 in Number of colors Up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 200:1 Brightness 180 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.259 à 0.259 mm 1280 à 800 RGB v er tical str ipe Backlight Edge lit Character display 80 à 25 T otal power consumption 4 W Viewing angle /-40° horizontal, 20/-40° v er tical typical
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â5 Ta b l e 6 - 4 Har d Drives 100-GB* 80-GB* 80-GB* Dimensions Height Width We i g h t 9.5 mm 70 mm 102 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g Interface type ATA - 5 ATA - 5 ATA - 5 T ransfer rate Synchronous (maximum) Security 100 MB/sec A T A security 100 MB/sec ATA s e c u r i t y 100 MB/sec A T A security Seek times (typical read, including setting) Single trac k Ave r a g e Maximum 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms Logical bloc ks â 195,364,233 156,301,488 156,301,488 Disc rotational speed 4200 r pm 5400 r pm 4200 r pm Operating temperature 5°C to 55°C (41°F to 131°F) â Certain restrictions and exclusio ns apply. Consult Customer Care for details. *1 GB = 1 billion b ytes when ref erring to hard dr iv e storage capacity . Actual accessible capacity is less . â Actual drive specificatio ns ma y differ slightly .
6â6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s 60-GB* 60-GB* 40-GB* Dimensions Height Width We i g h t 9.5 mm 70 mm 102 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g Interface type ATA - 5 ATA - 5 ATA - 5 T ransfer rate Synchronous (maximum) Security 100 MB/sec A T A security 100 MB/sec ATA s e c u r i t y 100 MB/sec A T A security Seek times (typical read, including setting) Single trac k Ave r a g e Maximum 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms Logical bloc ks â 117,210,240 117,210,240 78,140,160 Disc rotational speed 5400 r pm 4200 r pm 4200 r pm Operating temperature 5°C to 55°C (41°F to 131°F) â Certain restrictions and exclusio ns apply. Consult Customer Care for details. *1 GB = 1 billion b ytes when ref erring to hard dr iv e storage capacity . Actual accessible capacity is less . â Actual drive specificatio ns ma y differ slightly . Ta b l e 6 - 4 Har d Drives (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â7 Ta b l e 6 - 5 Primary 8-cell, Li-Ion Batter y P ack Dimensions Height Width Depth We i g h t 2.00 cm 9.40 cm 13.40 cm 0.34 kg 0.79 in 3.70 in 5.28 in 0.75 lb Energ y V oltage Amp-hour capacity W a tt-hour capacity 11.1 V 4.4 Ah 48 Wh T emperature Operating Nonoperating 5°C to 45°C 0°C to 60°C 41°F to 113°F 32°F to 140°F
6â8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 6 D VD/CD-R W Combo Drive Applicable disc Read: D VD-R, D VD-R W , D VD-ROM (D VD-5, D VD-9, D VD-10, D VD-18), CD-ROM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio , CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2), CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2), CD-R, CD-R W , Photo CD (single and multisession), and CD-Bridge Write: CD-R and CD-R W Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in) Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD media D VD media Random Full strok e < 110 ms < 210 ms < 130 ms < 225 ms A udio output level Line-out, 0.7 V r ms Cache b uffer 2 MB Data transfer rate CD-R (24X) CD-R W (10X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 3600 KB/s (150 KB/ s at 1X CD rate) 1500 KB/s (150 KB/ s at 1X CD rate) 3600 KB/s (150 KB/ s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â9 Ta b l e 6 - 7 DV D ± RW and CD-R W Double La yer Combo Drive Applicable disc Read: D VD-R, D VD-RW , D VD-RO M (D VD-5, D VD-9, D VD-10, D VD-18), CD-ROM (Mode 1 and 2), CD Digital A udio , CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2), CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2), CD-R, CD-R W , Photo CD (single and multisession), CD-Bridge Write: CD-R and CD-R W D VD-R and DV D - R W Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in) Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD D VD Random Full strok e < 175 ms < 285 ms < 230 ms < 335 ms A udio output level A udio-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 2 MB
6â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Data transfer rate CD-R (16X) CD-R W (8X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) D VD-R (4X) DV D - R W ( 2 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 2,400 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1,200 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 5,400 KB/s (1,352 KB /s at 1X D VD rate) 2,700 KB/s (1,352 KB /s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds Ta b l e 6 - 7 DV D ± RW and CD-R W Double La y er Combo Drive (Continued) Ta b l e 6 - 8 DV D ± RW and CD-R W Double La yer Combo Drive with LightScribe Applicable disc Read: D VD-R, D VD-RW , D VD-RO M (D VD-5, D VD-9, D VD-10, D VD-18), CD-ROM (Mode 1 and 2), CD Digital A udio , CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2), CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2), CD-R, CD-R W , Photo CD (single and multisession), CD-Bridge Write: CD-R and CD-R W D VD-R and DV D - R W Center hole diameter 1.5 cm (0.59 in) Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm (4.72 in) 8 cm (3.15 in)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â11 Disc thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in) T rack pitc h 0.74 µm Access time CD D VD Random Full strok e < 175 ms < 285 ms < 230 ms < 335 ms A udio output level A udio-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 2 MB Data transfer rate CD-R (16X) CD-R W (8X) CD-R OM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) D VD-R (4X) DV D - R W ( 2 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 2,400 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1,200 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3,600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1,352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 5,400 KB/s (1,352 KB /s at 1X D VD rate) 2,700 KB/s (1,352 KB /s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds Ta b l e 6 - 8 DV D ± RW and CD-R W Double La yer Combo Drive with LightScribe (Continued)
6â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 9 System DMA Hard ware DMA S ystem Function DMA0 Not applicable DMA1* Not applicable DMA2* Not applicable DMA3 Not applicable DMA4 Direct memor y access controller DMA5* A v ailable f or PC Card DMA6 Not assigned DMA7 Not assigned *PC Card controller ca n use DMA 1, 2, or 5.
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â13 T able 6-10 System Interrupts Hard ware IRQ System Function IRQ0 System timer IRQ1 Standard 101-/102-K ey or Microsoft Natural K eyboard IRQ2 Cascaded IRQ3 USB2 Enhanced Ho st Controllerâ24CD IRQ4 COM1 IRQ5* Cone xant A CâLink A udio Data F ax Modem with Smar tCP IRQ6 Diskette driv e IRQ7* P arallel por t IRQ8 System CMOS/real-time clock IRQ9* Microsoft A CPI-compliant system IRQ10* Realtek R TL8139 F amily PCI f ast Ether net Controller
6â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s IRQ11 TI OHCI 1394 host controller TI PCI1410 CardBus controller IRQ12 Synaptics PS/2 T ouchP ad IRQ13 Numer ic data processor IRQ14 Pri mar y IDE channel IRQ15 Secondar y IDE channel *Def ault configuration; audio possib le configurations are IRQ5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, or none. â PC Cards may assert IRQ3, IRQ4, IR Q5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, IRQ11, or IRQ15. Either the infrared or the se rial port may assert IRQ3 or IRQ4. T able 6-10 System Interrupts (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â15 T able 6-11 System I/O Addresses I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 000 - 00F DMA controller no . 1 010 - 01F Unused 020 - 021 Interrupt controller no . 1 022 - 024 Opti chipset configuration registers 025 - 03F Unused 02E - 02F 87334 âSuper I/Oâ configuration f or CPU 040 - 05F Counter/timer registers 044 - 05F Unused 060 K eyboard controller 061 P or t B 062 - 063 Unused 064 K eyboard controller 065 - 06F Unused 070 - 071 NMI enab le/R TC 072 - 07F Unused 080 - 08F DMA page registers 090 - 091 Unused 092 P or t A 093 - 09F Unused 0A0 - 0A1 Interrupt controller no . 2
6â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 0A2 - 0BF Unused 0C0 - 0DF DMA controller no . 2 0E0 - 0EF Unused 0F0 - 0F1 Coprocessor busy clear/reset 0F2 - 0FF Unused 100 - 16F Unused 170 - 177 Secondar y fix ed disk controller 178 - 1EF Unused 1F0 - 1F7 Pr imar y fix ed disk controller 1F8 - 200 Unused 201 Jo ystic k (decoded in ESS1688) 202 - 21F Unused 220 - 22F Enter tainment audio 230 - 26D Unused 26E - 26 Unused 278 - 27F Unused 280 - 2AB Unused 2A0 - 2A7 Unused 2A8 - 2E7 Unused 2E8 - 2EF Reser v ed serial por t T able 6-11 System I/O Addresses (Continued)
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de 6â17 I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 2F0 - 2F7 Unused 2F8 - 2FF Infrared por t 300 - 31F Unused 320 - 36F Unused 370 - 377 Secondar y diskette driv e controller 378 - 37F P arallel por t (LPT1/def ault) 380 - 387 Unused 388 - 38B FM synthesizerâOPL3 38C - 3AF Unused 3B0 - 3BB V GA 3BC - 3BF Reser v ed (parallel por t/no EPP suppor t) 3C0 - 3DF V GA 3E0 - 3E1 PC Card controller in CPU 3E2 - 3E3 Unused 3E8 - 3EF Inter nal modem 3F0 - 3F7 âAâ diskette controller 3F8 - 3FF Ser ial por t (COM1/default) CF8 - CFB PCI configuration inde x register (PCIDIV O-1) CFC - CFF PCI configuration data register (PCIDIV O-1) T able 6-11 System I/O Addresses (Continued)
6â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s T able 6-12 System Memory Map Size Memory Address System Function 640 KB 00000000-0009FFFF Base memory 128 KB 000A0000-000BFFFF Video memor y 48 KB 000C0000-000CBFFF Video BIOS 160 KB 000C8000-000E7FFF Unused 64 KB 000E8000-000FFFFF System BIOS 15 MB 00100000-00FFFFFF Extended memor y 58 MB 01000000-047FFFFF Super e xtended memor y 58 MB 04800000-07FFFFFF Unused 2 MB 08000000-080FFFFF Video memor y (direct access) 4 GB 08200000-FFFEFFFF Un used 64 KB FFFF0000-FFFFFFFF System BIOS
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ1 A Co nnec tor P in As sig nmen ts Ta b l e A - 1 A udio-Out (Headphone) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 A udio out, left channel 3 Ground 2 A udio out, right channel
Aâ2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e A - 2 A udio-In (Micr ophone) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 A udio signal in 3 Ground 2 A udio signal in Ta b l e A - 3 Universal Serial Bus Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 5 VDC 3 Data 2 Data â 4 Ground
Connec tor P in Assi gnments Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ3 Ta b l e A - 4 External Monitor Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Red analog 9 5 VDC 2 Green analog 10 Ground 3 Blue analog 11 Monitor detect 4 Not connected 12 DDC 2B data 5 Ground 13 Horizontal sync 6 Ground analog 14 V e r tical sync 7 Ground analog 15 DDC 2B clock 8 Ground analog
Aâ4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e A - 5 RJ-45 (Netw ork) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 T ransmit 5 Unused 2 T ransmit â 6 Receive â 3 Receive 7 Unused 4 Unused 8 Unused
Connec tor P in Assi gnments Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Aâ5 Ta b l e A - 6 RJ-11 (Modem) Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Unused 4 Unused 2T i p 5U n u s e d 3 Ring 6 Unused
Aâ6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e A - 7 S-Video-Out Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 S-VHS color (C) signal 5 TV -CD 2 Composite video signal 6 S-VHS intensity ground 3 S-VHS intensity (Y) signal 7 Composite video ground 4 S-VHS color ground
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Bâ1 B P o w er C ord Set Requ irements 3-Con duc tor P o wer Cord Set The wide range input feature of the computer permits it to operate from any line v oltage from 100 to 120 or 220 to 240 volts A C. The po wer cord set included with the computer meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment is purchased. Po wer cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where the computer is used.
Bâ2 Maintenance and Se rvice Gui de P ow er Cor d Set Requir ements Gen eral R equiremen ts The requirements listed belo w are applicable to all countries. â The length of the po wer cord set must be at least 1.5 m (5.0 ft) and a maximum of 2.0 m (6.5 ft). â All po wer cord sets must be approv ed by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for e valuation in the country where the po wer cord set will be used. â The po wer cord sets must ha ve a minimum current capacity of 10 amps and a nominal v oltage rating of 125 or 250 V A C, as required by each countryâ s po wer system. â The appliance coupler must meet the mechanical conf iguration of an EN 60 320/IEC 320 Standard Sheet C13 connector for mating with the ap pliance inlet on the back of the computer .
P ow er Cor d Set R equirements Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Bâ3 Coun tr y-Spec ific Requirements 3-Conductor P ower Cor d Set Requirements Country/Region Accredited Agenc y Applicab le Note Number A ustralia EANSW 1 Au s t r i a OVE 1 Belgium C EBC 1 Canada CSA 2 Denmark D EMK O 1 Finland FIMK O 1 F rance UTE 1 Ger many VDE 1 Italy IMQ 1 Jap a n ME T I 3 â NOTES: 1. The fle xible cord m ust be <HAR> T ype HO5VV -F , 3-conductor , 1.0 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mark of the agency responsible f or e v aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 2. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype SPT -3 or equivalent, No . 18 A WG, 3-conductor . The wall plug must be a tw o-pole grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration. 3. The appliance coupler , flex ible cord, and w all plug must bear a âTâ mark and registration number in accordance with the J apanese Dentor i Law . The fle xib le cord must be T ype VCT or VCTF , 3-conductor , 1.00 mm² conductor size . The wall plug m ust be a two-po le grounding type with a J apanese Industrial Standard C8303 (7 A, 125 V) configuration.
Bâ4 Maintenance and Se rvice Gui de P ow er Cor d Set Requir ements Ko r e a E K 4 The Netherlands KE A 1 Norwa y NEMK O 1 P eopleâ s Repub lic of China CCC 5 Sweden SEMK O 1 Switzerland SEV 1 T aiwan BSMI 4 United Kingdom BSI 1 United States UL 2 â NOTES: 1. The fle xible cord m ust be <HAR> T ype HO5VV -F , 3-conductor , 1.0 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mark of the agency responsible f or e v aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 2. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype SPT -3 or equivalent, No . 18 A WG, 3-conductor . The wall plug must be a tw o-pole grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration. 3. The appliance coupler , flex ible cord, and w all plug must bear a âTâ mark and registration number in accordance with the J apanese Dentor i Law . The fle xib le cord must be T ype VCT or VCTF , 3-conductor , 1.00 mm² conductor size . The wall plug m ust be a two-po le grounding type with a J apanese Industrial Standard C8303 (7 A, 125 V) configuration. 4. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype R VV , 3-conductor , 0.75 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance co upler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mar k of the agency resp onsible f or ev aluation in the country where it will be used. 5. The fle xible cord m ust be T ype VC TF , 3-conductor , 0.75 mm² conductor size . P ower cord set fittings (appliance coupler and w all plug) must bear the cer tification mar k of the agency respon sible f or ev aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 3-Conductor P ower Cor d Set Requirements (Continued) Country/Region Accredited Agenc y Applicab le Note Number
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ1 C Sc r e w Li sting This appendix provides specif ication and reference information for the scre ws and scre w locks used in the computer . All scre ws listed in this appendix are a v ailable in the Computer Scre w Kit, spare part number 403813-001, and the Display Scre w Kit, spare part number 403886-001. Phillips P M3 . 0Ã4.0 S cr ew L ocations Ta b l e C - 1 Phillips PM3.0Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 4 4.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the hard driv e fram e to the hard driv e (documented in Section 5.4 ) mm
Câ2 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Scr e w Listing Black Phillip s P M2 .5Ã6 .0 S cr ew L ocations Ta b l e C - 2 Blac k Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 5 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 Three screws that secure the hard driv e cov er to the computer (scre ws are captured on the cov er by C clips; documented in Section 5.4 ) 2 T wo scre ws that secure the memory/M ini Card module compar tment cov er to the computer (screws are captured on the cov er b y C clips; documented in Section 5.6 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ3 Silv er Phillips P M 2 .5Ã6 .0 S c r e w Locati ons Ta b l e C - 3 Silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 30 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the hard driv e to the computer (documented in Section 5.4 ) mm
Câ4 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Scr e w Listing Silv er Phillips P M 2 .5Ã6 .0 S cr ew L ocati on Ta b l e C - 3 Silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 30 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: One screw that secures the k e yboard assemb ly to the computer (documented in Section 5.11 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ5 Silv er Phillips P M 2 .5Ã6 .0 S cr ew L ocati on Ta b l e C - 3 Silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 30 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: One screw that secures the displa y asse mbly to the computer (documented in Section 5.14 ) mm
Câ6 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Scr e w Listing Silv er Phillips P M 2 .5Ã6 .0 S c r e w Locati ons Ta b l e C - 3 Silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 30 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 3 screws that secure the top co v e r to the computer (documented in Section 5.15 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ7 Silv er Phillips P M 2 .5Ã6 .0 S c r e w Locati ons Ta b l e C - 3 Silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 30 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 8 screws that secure the top co v e r to the computer (documented in Section 5.15 ) mm
Câ8 Maint enance and Servi ce Guide Scr e w Listing Silv er Phillips P M 2 .5Ã6 .0 S c r e w Locati ons Ta b l e C - 3 Silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 30 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the base enclosur e suppor t brack et to the computer (documented in Section 5.16 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ9 Silv er Phillips P M 2 .5Ã6 .0 S c r e w Locati ons Ta b l e C - 3 Silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 30 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the system boar d to the computer (documented in Section 5.16 ) mm
Câ10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listing Phillips P M2 .5Ã6 . 0 Scr ew L ocatio n Ta b l e C - 3 Silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 30 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: One screw that secures the connector b oard to the computer (documented in Section 5.16 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ11 Phillips P M2 .5Ã6 . 0 Scr ew L ocatio ns Ta b l e C - 3 Silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 30 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the speak er asse mbly to the computer (documented in Section 5.20 ) mm
Câ12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listing Silv er Phillips P M 2 .5Ã6 .0 S c r e w Locati ons Ta b l e C - 3 Silver Phillips PM2.5Ã6.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 30 6.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 4 screws that secure the f an/heat sink assembly to the computer (documented in Section 5.21 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ13 Phillips P M2 .5Ã4. 0 Scr e w L ocati ons Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 17 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 3 screws that secure the s witch co v er to the computer (documented in Section 5.10 ) mm
Câ14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listing Phillips P M2 .5Ã4. 0 Scr e w L ocati ons Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 17 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 1 F our scre ws that secure the LED boa rd to the ke yboard frame (documented in Section 5.12 ) 2 Fiv e screws that secure the k eyboard to the k eyboard fr ame (documented in Section 5.13 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ15 Phillips P M2 .5Ã4. 0 Scr e w L ocati ons Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 17 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the displa y panel to the display enclosure (documented in Section 5.14 ) mm
Câ16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listing Phillips P M2 .5Ã4. 0 Scr e w L ocati ons Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 17 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the top co v e r to the computer (documented in Section 5.15 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ17 Phillips P M2 .5Ã4. 0 Sc r ew L ocation Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 17 4.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: One screw that secures the f an/heat si nk assembly and e xpansion por t brac ket to the system board (documented in Section 5.21 ) mm
Câ18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listing Phillips P M2 .0Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e C - 5 Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 15 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the optical driv e br ac k et to the optical drive (documented in Section 5.9 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ19 Phillips P M2 .0Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e C - 5 Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 15 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 8 screws that secure the displa y hinges to the displa y panel (documented in Section 5.14 ) mm
Câ20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Scr e w Listing Phillips P M2 .0Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocation Ta b l e C - 5 Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 15 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 4.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the displa y inv er ter to the display enclosure (documented in Section 5.14 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ21 Phillips P M2 .0Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e C - 5 Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 15 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the Bluetooth mo dule to the computer (documented in Section 5.17 ) mm
Câ2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr e w Listing Phillips P M2 .0Ã4. 0 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e C - 5 Phillips PM2.0Ã4.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 15 4.0 mm 2.0 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the PC Card asse mbly to the system board (documented in Section 5.23 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ2 3 Phillips P M2 .5Ã13 . 0 Sc r e w L ocations Ta b l e C - 6 Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 15 13.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 1 One scre w that secures the optical dr iv e to the computer (documented in Section 5.9 ) 2 T wo scre ws that secure the s w itch co ver to the computer (documented in Section 5.10 ) mm
Câ2 4 Mainte nance and Servi ce Guide Scr e w Listing Phillips P M2 .5Ã13 . 0 Sc r e w L ocation Ta b l e C - 6 Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 15 13.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: One scre w that secures the ke yboard assemb ly to the computer (documented in Section 5.11 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de C â2 5 Phillips P M2 .5Ã13 . 0 Sc r e w L ocations Ta b l e C - 6 Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 15 13.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 5 screws that secure the top co v e r to the computer (documented in Section 5.15 ) mm
Câ2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr e w Listing Phillips P M2 .5Ã13 . 0 Sc r e w L ocations Ta b l e C - 6 Phillips PM2.5Ã13.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 15 13.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 6 screws that secure the top co v e r to the computer (documented in Section 5.15 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ2 7 Phillips P M2 .5Ã9 . 0 Scr e w Locatio ns Ta b l e C - 7 Phillips PM2.5Ã9.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 6 9.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 5 screws that secure the displa y asse mbly to the computer (documented in Section 5.14 ) mm
Câ2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr e w Listing Phillips P M2 .5Ã9 . 0 Scr e w Locatio n Ta b l e C - 7 Phillips PM2.5Ã9.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 6 9.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: One screw that secures the system bo ard to the computer (documented in Section 5.16 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de C â2 9 Phillips P M2 .5Ã7 . 0 Scr e w Locations Ta b l e C - 8 Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 8 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 6 screws that secure the displa y bezel to the displa y assemb ly (documented in Section 5.14 ) mm
Câ30 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr e w Listing Phillips P M2 .5Ã7 . 0 Scr e w Locations Ta b l e C - 8 Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 8 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 4.5 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the displa y panel to the display enclosure (documented in Section 5.14 ) mm
S crew Li st i n g Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Câ31 Slotted SM1. 5Ã9 . 0 Sc r e w L ocations Ta b l e C - 9 Slotted SM1.5Ã9.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 2 9.0 mm 1.5 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the f an/heat si nk assembly to the system board (documented in Section 5.21 ) mm
Câ3 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Scr e w Listing Phillips P M3 . 0Ã7 . 0 Sc r e w L ocati ons T able C-10 Phillips PM3.0Ã7.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Blac k 10 7.0 mm 3.0 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 2 screws that secure the f an/heat si nk assembly to the system board (documented in Section 5.21 ) mm
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Dâ1 D Dis pl a y C ompon ent Recy c lin g à W ARN ING: The backli ght contains mer cury . Cauti on should be e x er c ised w hen re mov ing and handling the backligh t to av oid damaging this component and ca using e xposur e to the merc ur y . à CA UTION: The pr ocedure s in this appendi x can r esult in damage to displa y components . T he only compo nents intended f or r ecy c ling purpo ses ar e the liquid c rys tal displa y (L CD) panel and the backlight . Car ef ul handling should be e x er c ised w hen r emo v ing these components . â Materials Disposal This HP product contains mercury in the display assembly backlight and may require special handling at end-of-life. Disposal of mercury may be regulated because of en vironmental considerations. For disposal or rec ycling information, contact your local authorities or visit the Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) at http://www .eiae.org .
Dâ2 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling This appendix provides disassembl y instructions for the display assembly . The display assembly must be disassembled to gain access to the backlight 1 and the LCD panel 2 . â Disassembly procedures dif fer from one display assembly to another . The procedures provided in this appendix are general disassembly instructions. Specif ic details, such as scre w sizes, quantities, and locations, and co mponent shapes and sizes, can v ary from one computer model to another . Refer to Section 5.14, âDisplay Assembly , â for display assembly disassembly steps.
Displa y Componen t Rec yc l ing Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Dâ3 Perform the follo wing steps to disassemble the display assembly: 1. Remov e all scre w covers 1 and scre ws 2 that secure the display bezel to the display assembly . R emo v ing the Displa y Bez el Scr ew C o v ers and Sc re w s
Dâ4 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 2. Lift up and out on the left and right inside edges 1 and the top and bottom inside edges 2 of the display bezel until the bezel disengages from the display assembly . 3. Remov e the display bezel 3 . R emo v ing the Displa y Bez el
Displa y Componen t Rec yc l ing Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Dâ5 4. Disconnect all LCD panel cables 1 from the display in verter and remov e the in verter 2 . R emo v ing the Displa y In ve rter
Dâ6 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 5. Remov e all scre ws 1 that secure the LCD panel to the display enclosure. 6. Remov e the LCD panel 2 from the display enclosure. R emo v ing the L CD P anel
Displa y Componen t Rec yc l ing Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Dâ7 7. T urn the LCD panel upside do wn. 8. Remov e all scre ws that secure the LCD panel frame to the LCD panel. R emo v ing the L CD P anel F r ame Sc r ew s
Dâ8 Maintenance and Servi ce Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 9. Use a sharp-edged tool to cut the tape 1 that secures the side of the LCD panel to the LCD panel frame. 10. Remov e the LCD panel frame 2 from the display panel. R emo v ing the L CD P anel F r ame
Displa y Componen t Rec yc l ing Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Dâ9 11. Remov e the scre ws 1 that secure the backlight co ver to the LCD panel. 12. Lift the top edge of the backlight cov er 2 and swing it forward. 13. Remov e the backlight co ver . R emo v ing the Back light C o v er
Dâ10 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 14. T urn the LCD panel right-side up. 15. Remov e the backlight cables 1 from the clip 2 in the LCD panel. R eleasing the Bac kligh t Cable s
Displa y Componen t Rec yc l ing Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Dâ11 16. T urn the LCD panel upside do wn. 17. Remov e the backlight frame from the LCD panel. R emo v ing the Back light F rame
Dâ12 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling à W ARN ING: The backli ght contains mer cury . Cauti on should be e x er c ised w hen re mov ing and handling the backligh t to av oid damaging this component and ca using e xposur e to the merc ur y . 18. Slide the backlight out of the backlight frame. R emo v ing the Back light
Displa y Componen t Rec yc l ing Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Dâ13 19. Disconnect the display cable 1 from the LCD panel. 20. Remov e the scre ws 2 that secure the LCD panel to the LCD rear panel. 21. Release the LCD panel 3 from the LCD rear panel. 22. Release the tape 4 that secures the LCD panel to the LCD rear panel. R eleasing the L CD P anel
Dâ14 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Display C omponent R ecy cling 23. Remov e the LCD panel. R emo v ing the L CD P anel 24. Recycle the backlight and LCD panel.
Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde xâ1 In de x 1394 port 1â11 A arrow keys 1â15 audio troubleshooting 2â23 audio-in jack location 1â9 pin assignments Aâ2 audio-out jack location 1â9 pin assignments Aâ1 B base enclosure, spare part number 3â7, 3â22 battery bay 1â13, 1â22 battery light 1â7 battery pack removal 5â5 spare part number 3â7, 3â20 , 5â5 specifications 6â7 battery release latch 1â22 Bluetooth module removal 5â54 spare part number 3â7, 3â20 , 5â54 Bluetooth module cable illustrated 3â15 removal 5â56 bottom components 1â22 Bracket Kit contents 3â5, 3â22 spare part number 3â5 , 3â22 C Cable Kit components 3â15 spare part number 3â15, 3â22 cables, service considerations 4â2 caps lock key 1â15 CMOS clearing 1â4 components bottom 1â22 front 1â6 keyboard 1â14 left-side 1â10, 1â12 right-side 1â8 top 1â16 , 1â18, 1â21 computer feet illustrated 3â14 locations 5â9
Inde xâ2 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Inde x Computer Setup Advanced Menu 2â6 defaults 2â2 File Menu 2â3 overview 2â1 Security Menu 2â4 Tools Menu 2â5 computer specifications 6â1 connector pin assignments audio-in Aâ2 audio-out Aâ1 external monitor Aâ3 RJ-11 Aâ5 RJ-45 Aâ4 S-Video-out Aâ6 Universal Serial Bus (USB) Aâ2 connectors, service considerations 4â2 D design overview 1â24 Digital Media Slot 1â11 Digital Media Slot light 1â11 disassembly sequence chart 5â3 diskette drive OS loading problems 2â21 precautions 4â3 display assembly removal 5â30 spare part numbers 3â3, 3â20 , 3â25 , 5â30 specifications 6â3, 6â4 Display Hinge Kit components 3â13, 3â23, 3â26 , 5â33 spare part number 3â13, 3â23 , 3â26 , 5â33 display hinge support bracket illustrated 3â5 removal 5â49 display inverter board removal 5â38 spare part number 3â13, 3â22 , 3â26 , 5â33 Display Label Kit, spare part number 3â13, 3â23, 5â33 Display Panel Kit, spare part number 3â13, 3â23, 3â26, 5â33 Display Plastics Kit components 3â13, 3â22, 3â26 , 5â33 spare part number 3â13, 3â22 , 3â26 , 5â33 display release latch 1â7 Display Screw Kit, spare part number 3â13, 3â23, 5â33 display switch 1â16 docking device, troubleshooting 2â16 drive light 1â7 drives, preventing damage 4â3 DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive OS loading problems 2â22 precautions 4â3 removal 5â17
Inde x Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde xâ3 spare part number 3â5, 3â17 , 3â20 , 5â17 specifications 6â8 DVD±RW and CD-RW Double Layer Combo Drive OS loading problems 2â22 precautions 4â3 removal 5â17 spare part number 3â5, 3â17 , 3â20 , 5â17 specifications 6â9, 6â10 E electrostatic discharge 4â4, 4â8 expansion port 2 1â11 expansion port 2 bracket removal 5â67 spare part number 3â5, 3â25 ExpressCard assembly removal 5â50 spare part number 3â7, 3â22 ExpressCard slot 1â9 ExpressCard slot bezel illustrated 3â14 removal 5â48 external monitor port location 1â10 pin assignments Aâ3 F f1 to f12 keys 1â15 fan assembly, spare part number 3â26 fan/heat sink assembly removal 5â64 spare part number 3â5 , 3â25 , 5â64 features 1â2 feet illustrated 3â14 locations 5â9 flowcharts, troubleshooting no audio 2â23, 2â24 no network/modem connection 2â28 no OS loading 2â17 no OS loading from diskette drive 2â21 no OS loading from hard drive 2â18, 2â19, 2â20 no OS loading from optical drive 2â22 no power 2â10 , 2â12 , 2â13 no video 2â14, 2â15 nonfunctioning device 2â25 nonfunctioning docking device 2â16 nonfunctioning keyboard 2â26 nonfunctioning pointing device 2â27 fn key 1â15 front components 1â6
Inde xâ4 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Inde x G grounding equipment and methods 4â7 H hard drive OS loading problems 2â18 precautions 4â3 removal 5â6 spare part numbers 3â7, 3â17 , 3â25 , 3â26 , 5â6 specifications 6â5 hard drive bay 1â23 hard drive cover illustrated 3â14 removal 5â6 headphone jack, pin assignments Aâ1 headset, spare part number 3â18 , 3â20 HP Mobile Remote Control, spare part number 3â18, 3â23 I I/O address specifications 6â15 interrupt specifications 6â13 K keyboard removal 5â28 spare part numbers 3â3, 3â20 , 3â21 , 5â28 troubleshooting 2â26 keyboard components 1â14 keyboard frame removal 5â22 spare part number 3â3 , 3â22 , 5â22 spare part numbers 5â22 keypad keys 1â15 L LED board removal 5â26 spare part number 3â3 , 3â25 , 5â26 left-side components 1â10, 1â12 M mass storage devices, spare part numbers 3â16 memory map specifications 6â18 memory module removal 5â10 spare part numbers 3â11, 3â20 , 3â23 , 3â25 , 5â10 memory/Mini Card module compartment cover illustrated 3â14 location 1â23 removal 5â11 microphone jack, pin assignments Aâ2 Mini Card communications module removal 5â13 spare part numbers 3â9, 3â11 , 3â23 , 3â24 , 3â26
Inde x Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde xâ5 modem cable illustrated 3â15 removal 5â57 modem jack location 1â13 pin assignments Aâ5 modem, troubleshooting 2â28 N network jack location 1â10 pin assignments Aâ4 network, troubleshooting 2â28 nonfunctioning device, troubleshooting 2â16, 2â25 num lock key 1â15 O optical drive location 1â9, 1â22 OS loading problems 2â22 precautions 4â3 removal 5â17 spare part numbers 3â5, 3â17 specifications 6â8 optical drive connector board removal 5â53 spare part number 3â5, 3â25 P packing precautions 4â5 Pad Kit, spare part number 3â22 password clearing 1â4 PC Card assembly removal 5â72 spare part number 3â7 , 3â22 , 5â72 PC Card slot 1â11 PC Card slot bezel, illustrated 3â14 plastic parts 4â2 Plastics Kit components 3â14 spare part number 3â7 , 3â14 , 3â26 pointing device, troubleshooting 2â27 power button 1â17 power connector 1â10 power connector cable illustrated 3â15 removal 5â69 power cord set requirements Bâ2 spare part numbers 3â19, 3â21 power light 1â7, 1â17 power management features 1â5 power supply, spare part number 3â19 power, troubleshooting 2â10 precautions DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive 4â3 DVD±RW and CD-RW Double Layer Combo Drive 4â3
Inde xâ6 Maintenance and Serv ice Guide Inde x hard drive 4â3 optical drive 4â3 processor removal 5â70 spare part numbers 3â5, 3â24 , 3â25 , 5â70 Q Quick Launch calculator button 1â20 R remote control, spare part number 3â23 removal/replacement preliminaries 4â1 procedures 5â1 right-side components 1â8 RJ-11 jack location 1â13 pin assignments Aâ5 RJ-45 jack location 1â10 pin assignments Aâ4 RTC battery removal 5â16 spare part number 3â7, 3â22 , 5â16 S Screw Kit contents Câ1 spare part numbers 3â13, 3â18 , 3â22 , 3â23 , 5â33 , Câ1 screw listing Câ1 security cable slot 1â13 serial number 3â1, 5â2 service considerations 4â2 speaker assembly removal 5â61 spare part number 3â5 , 3â22 , 5â61 speakers, location 1â7 specifications battery pack 6â7 computer 6â1 display assembly 6â3, 6â4 DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive 6â8 DVD±RW and CD-RW Double Layer Combo Drive 6â9, 6â10 hard drive 6â5 I/O addresses 6â15 interrupts 6â13 memory map 6â18 optical drive 6â8 system DMA 6â12 static shielding materials 4â8 S-Video-out jack location 1â10 pin assignments Aâ6 switch cover removal 5â20 spare part number 3â3 , 3â22 , 5â20 system board removal 5â47 spare part number 3â5 , 3â24 , 5â47 system DMA 6â12 system memory map 6â18
Inde x Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Inde xâ7 T tools required 4â1 top components 1â16, 1â18, 1â21 top cover removal 5â40 spare part number 3â3, 3â22 , 5â40 TouchPad cable 3â15 transporting precautions 4â5 troubleshooting audio 2â23 Computer Setup 2â2 docking device 2â16 flowcharts 2â7 keyboard 2â26 modem 2â28 network 2â28 nonfunctioning device 2â16 , 2â25 OS loading 2â17 overview 2â1 pointing device 2â27 power 2â10 video 2â14 U Universal Serial Bus (USB) port location 1â9, 1â11 pin assignments Aâ2 unknown password 1â4 USB board removal 5â59 spare part number 3â5, 3â25 , 5â59 USB board cable illustrated 3â15 removal 5â60 USB digital drive, spare part number 3â17, 3â18, 3â20 USB travel mouse, spare part number 3â18, 3â20 V vent, locations 1â13, 1â23 video troubleshooting 2â14 volume buttons 1â17 W Windows applications key 1â15 Windows logo key 1â15 wireless antenna removal 5â39 spare part number 3â13, 3â22 , 5â33 wireless button 1â17 wireless light 1â13, 1â16 workstation precautions 4â6